JP6532173B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a "pachinko machine").

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a big hit game is performed in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In this type of gaming machine, a main frame which is supported from the front side so as to be removable from the front side and which is attached directly or via an outer frame to the island facilities of the gaming hall and the front of the main frame is opened and closed. As well as a door frame with a game window facing the camera, and a decorative member capable of emitting light in the door frame to enhance the decorative effect and allow the player to be entertained (for example, a patent) Literature 1).

JP, 2009-195354, A

  However, conventional gaming machines have low appeal to players and it has been difficult to attract players' attention strongly.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that has high appeal and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Means 1: A starting opening capable of receiving a game ball, and a special drawing means for performing a special drawing based on the reception of the game ball to the starting opening, the special game based on the result of the special drawing being a hit Is a game machine to be executed,
A gate provided upstream of the starting opening;
Normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the game ball passing through the gate;
A movable member operable to facilitate reception of gaming balls into the starting opening;
Movable member control means capable of executing control for facilitating acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening by operating the movable member according to the result of the normal lottery by the normal lottery means;
Equipped with
The game ball passed through the gate provided in one unit is received by the operation of the movable member according to the result of the normal lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball itself to the starting opening provided in the same unit Made possible,
further,
The game ball which has passed through the gate has deceleration means for reducing the flow-down speed of the game ball until it reaches the movable member ,
The variable display of the normal symbol is performed according to the normal lottery by the normal lottery means, and the variable display of the normal symbol can be performed in a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball to be fired,
It is possible by one game ball from the passage of the gate to the entrance of the starting opening whose reception is facilitated by the control of the movable member based on the passage of the gate, and the one game ball The number of gaming balls awarded as a prize for having entered the starting opening is also only one,
The flow path between the gate and the movable member flows down to the movable member so that all gaming balls having passed through the gate can not be received by the start opening by the operation of the movable member. A game machine characterized in that a region communicating with the flow path is provided .

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has high appeal and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit by photography. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the plate unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was looked after. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball | bowl feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and viewed from the rear. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member seen from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the approximate center of the up-down direction. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution passage of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc. disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 later. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the front component of embodiment different from the example of FIG. 103 grade | etc., And was seen from the front. FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board when FIG. 106 is viewed later. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main part frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonal back. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in the game board from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at an attacker unit from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit into every main member, and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st unit in an attacker unit, and was looked after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd unit in an attacker unit, and was looked after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 3rd unit in an attacker unit, and it saw after it. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 4th unit in the attacker unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 4th unit in an attacker unit, and was looked after. It is a front view which cut | disconnects and shows a part of attacker unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at center character from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at center characters obliquely from the lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a center character later. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center part into every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center goods into every main member, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center role from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front right middle production unit of the center role thing from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front right middle rendering unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rendering unit in the front right, and was seen after. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd embodiment of the fixed decoration in a front right middle rendering unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 disassembled and seen afterward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decoration body of FIG. 141 from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the position slightly left with respect to the front, (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further to the left than (b). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a structure of the effect sheet in the fixed decoration body of FIG. 141, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of light extinction, (c) shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of blue lighting It is explanatory drawing and (d) is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission decoration aspect at the time of red lighting. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into main component members, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back side production unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side production unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back side production unit into every main member, and was seen after. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at one rotation decoration body unit in a back side production unit back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit of the back side production unit, and was seen after. It is a front view of the game board which shows the motion of the front right middle production unit of the center role in the front unit. (A) is a perspective view of the movable decoration in the front of the rendering unit in the front right, viewed from the front slightly in the normal position, and (b) is a front view of the movable decoration in the front. It is the perspective view seen from somewhat above. It is a front view of the game board which shows a motion of the back side production unit in a back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the movement of a back up production unit and a back down performance unit in a back unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) It is a big hit judging table used for lottery processing about a big hit, and (B) It is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing about big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16mS steady process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck is It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 5 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, the player can not touch the game ball or the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 110) in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13, and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook 20c. Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be increased. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 A left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the front of the door frame base main body 110 on the lower end left and right sides of the game window 101, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110 A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base main body 110 and supporting the handle device 500 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side in front view. It further comprises a cover member 134 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a rear end surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 A wiring holding member 197 holding a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) for connecting the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wiring cord 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is to be connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the far cover unit 540 can be inserted through the pivoting side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of mounting holes are formed at appropriate positions for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like. In the door frame base main body 110, an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 to which the side speaker 130 is attached and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 are at appropriate positions. It is formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security concave portion 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape from the front side is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to make a hole by a thin drill or the like from the joining portion between the side decoration unit 200, 240 and the dish unit 300 as metal. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 25 to FIG. 27 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding is formed in the holding holes 197a which are paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It is pushed forward by the part, and it will rotate in the direction which approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend is large (sharp) near the end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is supported is moved so that the free end moves toward the main frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. Respective decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as electric devices, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball lending units 360, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. Or it can be set as the door frame 5, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention property with respect to a fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 extends from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 141 extending in the longitudinal direction to the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 from the rear end. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of the tool, and to prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as it is disassembled and seen afterward.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210. The right side upper decoration substrate 214 is disposed on the upper side from the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; The lower side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the lower surface of the lens 212 from the approximate center of the vertical direction and on the surface of which the plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted Right-handed rhinoceros attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the right side upper decoration substrate 214 The upper decoration substrate cover 218 and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to cover the back side of the right side lower decoration substrate 216 and to sandwich the right side lower decoration substrate 216 ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 on the front of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and the side lens 210 A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attachment to the upper portion 212 and an upper right speaker 222 for attachment to the upper side inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, the side outer cover 202, the side flash lens 204, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are formed of translucent members. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the lower right side decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. 216a, 216b, etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side. In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As illustrated, the right end and the upper end of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view, and the left end is the game window 101 Is formed in a curved shape along the outer periphery on the right side of. The side lens 210 is divided into a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210 a consisting of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces and the circumferential lens portions 210 a in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and a plurality of circles extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens unit 210b having a prism surface of The plurality of radiation lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed to extend on radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in a front view, as shown in the figure, and from the front surface of the circumferential lens portion 210a The side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side surface, side diffusion lens portions 210c that extend in the front-rear direction and are aligned in the vertical direction. The light from the upper right side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 can be widely diffused in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the side diffusion lens portion 210c. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker in the side lens 210, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably made to the player side It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent and is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and as shown in the drawing, the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkled shape The portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface. Further, although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses, and the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glittered in cooperation with the side lens 210 disposed on the front side. It is now possible to make it appear strange and unclear with a sense of perspective.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.), And the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively illuminated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. In the present example, the LEDs 214 c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red and green LEDs.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 supporting the upper right speaker 222 has a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in front view, and the upper end back side of the horn portion The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. In the same manner as the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed with a wrinkled front surface, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a forwardly protruding peak portion of the wrinkled portion. The light is irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and disposed on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and simulates a rocky area by a plurality of spindle-like curved surfaces. The side lens 210 can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214 b and 216 a of the right upper side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 disposed on the rear side, and the circumferential lens portion 210 a Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 32 to FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. Along the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and an elliptical shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. Frame-like lower decoration frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, and two large window frames 244a continuous on the upper side of the lower lower decoration frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and And a frame-like upper decoration frame 244 having an oval small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side flash lens 246 and a side flash lens 246, which are fitted from the rear side to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244. Transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of circumferential lens portions 250 a that are supported from the rear side and are fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244. A plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 are formed, and an inner decorative member 251 provided with a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface, and a rear side of the inner decorative member 251 And a plurality of radially extending bands centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decoration substrate cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is transparent on the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252 by supporting the upper left portion speaker 262 and the upper left portion speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and front view upper right portion. A diffusion portion formed by an upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of strip lenses attached to the front of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right in front view and centered on the lower right and left center And an upper right inner lens 266 having a 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is formed of an opaque member, and the lower side decoration frame 242, the upper side decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer of a predetermined color (in this example, a silver color). The side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the lower lower decoration frame 242 and the upper upper decoration frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) On both sides sandwiching the frames 242b and 244b, opening frames 242c and 244c are formed to penetrate in a state where the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are cut away, and the small window frames 242b and 244b The opening frames 242 c and 244 c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 can not be viewed by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a can be viewed from the player side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion part 252a, and the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the back of the side inner lens 252. It is not possible to clearly see the side. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slits 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. can not be clearly viewed from the player side.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The lower side decoration frame 242 is formed between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and between the large window frames 242a and having a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side. It is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decoration frame 242 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246.

  Further, the upper side decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decoration frame 242 and has a substantially triangular shape in a front view extending from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 It is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose side is open. The upper side decoration frame 244 is a substantially oval small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and extending through the two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and extending in the front and rear direction. And an opening frame 244c which is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outer side of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and which is notched to the side. ing.

  This side upper decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted from the rear side to the large window frame 244a, and a side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decoration frame 244 can form an outer peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the side flash lens 246. The upper side decoration frame 244 is configured to form a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored in black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and can be seen.

  Also, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244, and has a size ranging from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the gaming window 101 There is. This side lens 250 is a form in which the peripheral lens portion 250 a fitted from the rear side into the lower window decoration frame 242 and the large window frames 242 a and 244 a of the upper side decoration frame 244 is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250 a. And a radiation lens portion 250b on the front side of which the side flash lens 246 is disposed. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decoration member 251 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of each circumferential lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front and back direction ing. The inner decorative member 251 also extends in the width direction so that the plurality of slits 251 a extend along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and are concentric with the center of the game window 101 as shown in the figure. There is more than one. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a metallic gloss of silver color on the surface, and can be viewed from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250 and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252 a which is bulged forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted from the rear side into the inside of each inner decorative member 251. In the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252, a plurality of strip lenses extending radially around the lower center of the game window 101 are formed on the front surface, and the inner side of the strip lens extending direction is disposed on the front side It intersects (substantially orthogonal) to the extending direction of the slit 251 a of the decorative member 251.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is irregularly refracted by the plurality of strip lenses formed in the diffusion portion 252a. The rear side is not clearly seen through the part 252a. Further, as illustrated, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  Further, the upper left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the large lower side decoration frame 242 and large upper side decoration frame 244 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portions 250a of the side lenses 250) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60.degree. To 180.degree.). LEDs 254 b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242 b and 244 b and the opening frames 242 c and 244 c of the lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 (the radiation lens portion 250 b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) 256b has a relatively narrow illumination angle (eg, 15 ° to 6 °) °) is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn (not shown) that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not seen from the player in front view It has become. In addition, a protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can be used to prevent tampering with the upper left speaker 262 or the insertion of an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 by breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, so that it is difficult for other pachinko machines to be noisy.

  Next, characteristic light-emitting effects in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the surface of the side lens 250 that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and includes the curved transparent circumferential lens portion 250a, and on the back side of the circumferential lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a having a metallic luster plated layer and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting with the extending direction of the slits 251a A side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed of a plurality of strip lenses, and a left side upper decoration substrate 254 and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 etc.). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252, and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, Light is emitted from the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light irradiated forward (side of the side lens 250) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is partially transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and irradiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the circumferential lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Then, since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decorative member 251 side by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a on the (front surface) side, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved respectively. The light reflected on the rear surface side converges, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused to the peripheral lens portion 250a. The indirect light reflected on the front surface of the lens portion 250 a and the inner decoration member 251 is respectively irradiated to the shifted position. Further, the light passing through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251 a by the diffusion portion 252 a formed by the plurality of strip lenses in the side inner lens 252 and intersected. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is longer than the width of the slit 251a, extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of stripes of light of different shading. It is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-like upper extension frame 281b which extends laterally from the top of the central frame 281a and narrows toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-like lower extending frame 281c which extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower part disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a smaller in diameter than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular member inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted in the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 in which a plurality of minute prisms are formed, an annular lens support member 286 which holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 And a light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a rear side of the light shielding member 287 arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a are mounted on the front surface of the upper central decorative substrate 288.

  Also, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, Of the upper side decoration substrate 290 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 289 covering the rear surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290 and attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the substrate cover 291 and extending backward A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and has a high degree of light transmission under the upper lower cover 293 And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Furthermore, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward in a plate shape from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 and has a cutout 295a whose rear end is open at the center in the left-right direction. The cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 closing the notch portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 in a front view and shaped into a predetermined shape .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281, and the front decorative member 281 is made to glow by external light. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central annular lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and the upper extension of the front decorative member 281 An extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c is provided. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are circumferentially arrayed, and an axial center of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. Thus, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms or strip lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 can not be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed to have a smooth spindle shape on the front side, while a plurality of lenses concentric to the rear side are formed, and light can be irregularly refracted, so the rear side is clear. It can not be seen by

  Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, respectively, within the frame of the upper central lens 284 and the central frame 281a in the front decorative member 281 The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, in the upper side decoration substrate 290 of the upper decoration unit 280, the plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can emit light and decorate the upper extending frame 281 b and the lower extending frame 281 c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting the LED 290 a.

[1-2 E. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the dish unit in the door frame, cut at a portion of the ball lending unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper dish upper panel 314 which is formed to be curved so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward in a visual manner, an upper dish front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper dish upper panel 314, and an upper dish front An upper dish upper inner decoration member 318 disposed between the decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314, and a portion on the right side of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and continuous with a right upper portion of the upper dish upper panel 314 A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the plate attachment base 320 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left and right center to the lower surface on the right And an upper dish decoration substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately lighting the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322, it is possible to make a part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 emit light and decorate.

  Furthermore, in the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are opened and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of a lock device 1000 described later at a portion covering the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extending to the right in front view An upper opening 330a and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328, the lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing the right side and the right side from the left, right center position of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Further, in the pan unit 300, the lower pan upper left side cover 332 obliquely extending covering the left front end of the lower pan main body 324 and the left front end of the lower pan top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower pan upper left side cover 332 Lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is closed from the rear side and the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 is made transparent And a frame-like holding member 337 which holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower plate lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower tray top plate 326 is covered by the upper tray front decoration member 316.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and formed in a continuous shape, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover member 339 having a plurality of holes and a disc-like shape which is loosely curved so as to close the rear side 338a and project the front side.

  In this example, since the cover 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to deform even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface. The cover 339 is colored black.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball ball supply port 310g by the gaming balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower ball ball supply port 310g, and more games A ball can be fed into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 313 which can be in contact with the game ball is attached at the rear end of the bottom and on the open side from the center in the lateral direction. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312, and a decorative attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position on the front side than the upper plate main body 312 at the center in the horizontal direction and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later. There is.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin so as to extend in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed to have a smooth shape on the left side from a position closer to the center right in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Further, although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the right rear surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly seen from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. Thereby, while the upper tray upper inner decorative member 318 is in the assembled state, the portion visible through the left side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen from the player side, while the right side of the upper tray front decorative member 316 The part seen through is seeming to be unclear from the player side and the feeling of a sense of distance not fixed.

  Further, the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces in the same manner as the right side portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and the upper dish upper decorative member 316 is The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper countersinking button 341 described later. In the upper dish upper right decoration member 319, a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed on the back surface (lower surface), and light can be irregularly refracted, and the lower side is not clearly seen from the player side There is. An upper plate decoration substrate 322 is disposed behind the right side of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and below the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper tray front decoration member 316 and the upper tray upper right decoration member 319 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to become lower toward the front side and to the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower flat plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver color and metallic feel (a matte state such as sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower tray side cover 330 is provided with a plate-like portion extending rearward from the lower end and forming a part of the bottom surface of the tray unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  In addition, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic gloss on the surface. Further, the lower plate lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plated layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends backward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 It has a plate-like part that forms The opening 334a of the lower tray lower left cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front of the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 described later, so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side It has become. The protective cover 336 for closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 close the bottom excluding the center in the left-right direction, and the lower unit side cover 330 and the lower unit lower left cover 334 The bottom surface between them is closed by the lower ball ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating unit 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper bowl ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the bowl unit base 310, and supports the operating plate 342 in an operable (rotatable) manner. A mounting base 346 attached to the front of the housing, and a contact piece which slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and abuts against the actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. 343a and arranged on the rear side of the dish unit base 310; The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. Thus, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper countersink base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b from the upper countersink outlet 310d. The ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and is transferred from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 etc. While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 in the disc unit 300 is disposed between the lower disc side cover 330 and the lower disc lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower disc body 324 to form a bottom central portion of the disc unit 300. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the extraction base 351 and the lower tray ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower disk sphere extraction hole 324b of the lower disk body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 And a lower disc ball extraction button 354, which is attached to the front end of the lower disc ball extraction slider 353. There is.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a which can close the lower ball ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter ball hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction , And the biasing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 so as to close the lower countersink opening 324b and the base opening 351a. .

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact with the lower flat ball slide slider 353, and this contact pin contacts the lower flat ball slide slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter opening hole 352b are pivoted to move backward by the lower opening ball slide slider 353, or the lower opening ball slide slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. It can be done.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersinking slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc ball out slider 353 toward the back The open / close shutter 352 turns against the biasing force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is pivoted to the rear, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slider 353 is moved backward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower counters ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361 Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attaching portion 310 b formed in the upper end decorative portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 which protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  More specifically, the rental ball unit 360 has a transparent front cover 365 covering the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363 and a lending remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365 and a lending ball button 361. And a return unit 362 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch activated by the operation of the return button 362 is attached, and a back side of the transfer unit base 366 covering the back side of the transfer unit base 366 And a rear cover 367 attached to the The crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball-sending unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball-sending unit 360 is attached is formed between a circular button opening 310m facing the ball-sending button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m A transparent front cover 365 having a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a cover 365 and a forwardly projecting protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and closing the display opening 310n. The loan remaining display portion 363 disposed on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310 o of the pan unit base 310 is formed to have a round front end.

  As illustrated, the ball unit 360 of the present embodiment has the ball unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the ball ball supply opening 310c. It is arranged to face. In addition, the rental ball unit 360 has a return button 362 disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental ball button 361. In the present example, the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (the rental ball unit attachment portion 310 b). Thus, the player can easily recognize the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the rental ball unit 360 includes a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (to the player) from the outer periphery of the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301, Since the hand touches the projecting portion 310o before touching the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the rental ball button 361 or the return button 362, and the rental ball button It is possible to prevent the erroneous operation of the 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new type of pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. FIG. 46 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed in a predetermined shape and has silver metallic gloss on the surface A layer-provided inner cover 427 and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. In the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428, a circular opening through which the outer cylindrical portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass is formed.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 430a through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A dial decoration substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detecting rotation of the dial operation unit 401, And a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by the substrate holding claws 416 g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end opposes and then protrudes inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are connected so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410; Have. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420 h for mounting the protruding dial decoration board 430. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion 401d can not pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pattern machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. Have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422 a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from being pulled upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1) The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  The cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 is, as illustrated, an opening 426a which vertically penetrates in the center and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then An inner cover 427 and a surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410 It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step 407a and the projection 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom (dish unit 300) of the operation unit attachment portion 314c Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and any problems with the dial drive means 414 due to overheating can be prevented. It can be made to withstand high loads Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the figure, through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle base 502 fixed at a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supporting the rear handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506 A shaft member 510 having a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 meshing with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a rotatable integrally with the transmission gear 511 And a rotational position detection sensor 512 held between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, with the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the clockwise direction in a front view via the transmission gear 511. An auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508 with respect to the touch sensor 516; A single-shot button 520 rotatably supported to operate the firing stop switch 518, one end attached to the handle base 502 and the other end attached to the handle main body 504, the handle main body 504 in an initial rotational position (counterclockwise in front view Urge to return to the rotating end) A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to the present embodiment is configured to have a rear end cylindrically extended rearwardly from a front end that is open on the front side and bulges backward. Three axially extending grooves 502a are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle unit 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a disposed concentrically with the rotation axis is formed in the handle main body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. The mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504 a in the handle main body 504 abuts on the mounting boss 506 a of the front end cover 506, whereby the rotation range of the handle main body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b that protrudes rearward, and the other end (front end side) of the coil-like handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, The detection shaft 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and when the player contacts the handle main body 504 or the like, the touch sensor 516 detects the contact. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects the player's touch, when the handle main body 504 is rotated, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is hit. It is possible to That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 (see FIG. 161) The rotational drive can be stopped. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The steering apparatus 500 according to the present embodiment electrically detects the rotation operation of the steering wheel main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512 and, based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the hit ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine are There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism to be linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration according to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. While being able to do, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of the trouble in the joint unit, to control the decrease in the player's interest due to the hitting trouble of the game ball It has to be able to bet.

[1-2 H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 and FIG. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door cover in an exploded manner, and FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view taken after the camera (B) disassembled the cover unit. Moreover, FIG. 53 is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52B, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction with the first ball inlet 542a, and the cover base in communication with the first ball inlet. A first ball passage 542b extending toward the front end of 542 toward the front as viewed from the front, and a second ball inlet 542c disposed outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and larger than the first ball inlet 542a And a second ball inlet 542c which is in communication with the second ball passage 542d and which extends downward and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view in the interior of the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 301 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 53, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of gaming balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, If the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540 and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also full, gaming balls are distributed to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). The second ball inlet 542 c, the second ball passage 542 d, and the second ball outlet 544 of the far cover unit 540 from the full tank outlet 776 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped on the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161). The user is notified that the player is urged to discharge the gaming balls in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 I. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. FIG. 54 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. 56 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 57 (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. (D) is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a turns in the direction of the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 56) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 is received. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular attachment recess 582b (see FIG. 56B, etc.) recessed forward is formed at the upper right on the back cover 582a of the back cover 582 in the back view. And the tamperproof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud preventing member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582 a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose entire outer diameter in a rear view is horizontally long, and is opposite to the substantially center in the vertical direction at the tip on the left side in the rear view. Of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c which are divided up and down with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of V formed between the upper piece 588 b and the lower piece 588 c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588 b in the direction (backward) perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 so as to be away from each other And an inclined portion 588e which is formed at the tip of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and is inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, in the fraud prevention member 588, the base end side of the upper piece 588b is bent so that the tip of the upper piece 588b (left end in rear view) moves backward, so that the cut portion 588d The wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I is inserted into the V-shaped interior, which is formed in a V-shape in plan view. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the proximal end It is formed as.

  The inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and can guide the wire Iw attached to the incorrect gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e into the cutting portion 588d. It is supposed to be. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as illustrated, and the cut portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b in the rear cover 582 A portion corresponding to the portion where the portion is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, it communicates with the striking ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in such a shape that the hitting ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the ball striking device 650 causes the illegal game ball I to be played on the game area of the gaming board 4. When driven into the interior 1100, the illegal gaming ball I fired by the striking device 650 moves along the launch rail 660 diagonally to the upper left in front view, and between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 It tries to penetrate into the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the force of the hit game ball I, and unlike the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, the wire Iw is a passage of the game ball It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance inside. Therefore, the wire Iw extended from the plate unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting launch device 650 side moves the gaming ball I in the upper left direction (upper right direction in rear view) in front view Then, to move onto the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back surface view of the hitting ball supply port 582a, and is moved into the mounting recess 582b formed in the back view upper right side of the ball hitting supply port 582a. And wire rod Iw which moved to the part (inside of attachment recess 582b) which extended to the right by back view of hitting supply port 582a is a cutting part by a pair of inclined parts 588e of fraud prevention member 588 arranged in the position concerned After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the incorrect game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I is pulled by the force of the illegal gaming ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) by the cutting portion 588d of the tamperproof member 588 In this state, friction and shear force are applied by the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire Iw (see FIG. 57D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal gaming ball I with the wire rod Iw is reduced by the friction acting on the wire rod Iw, the portion between the outer rail 1111 and the firing rail 660 does not enter the gaming area 1100. It will be discharged through the

  Therefore, since the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud preventing member 588, a fraudulent act is performed by the illegal gaming ball I with the wire Iw in the gaming area 1100. It is possible to prevent being cursed. In addition, even if an illegal game ball I intrudes into the game area 1100, as described above, since the wire Iw can be cut by the anti-corruption member 588, an illegal action can not be performed. Even if the wire Iw can not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the force of the illegal game ball I, thereby reducing the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and the game ball is hit. The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is made movable by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Furthermore, the tamperproof member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the tamperproof member 588 (cut portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball striking device 650. As a result, the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being fired by the ball striking device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d While the wire rod Iw is pulled fast (strongly) against it, the wire rod Iw can be cut reliably and at the same time, the impetus of the momentum of the game ball I is damped and prevented from entering the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed by the fraudulent game ball I.

  In addition, since the tamperproof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward can be configured not to protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the worker is injured during assembly by the upper piece portion 588b of the tamperproof member 588. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

[1-2 J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 108). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stop pieces 592a disposed at the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate-like engagement extending in the lateral direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2 K. Shaped decoration in the door frame]
Next, the shaped decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shaped decoration will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame at a substantially central position in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. , In a front view right side of the lower plate 302, for driving the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 for closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the game window 101. The tray unit 300 is disposed as shown.

  The door frame 5 has a greatly different appearance on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. While the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 viewed from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 on the left side is a sharp and artificial metallic appearance ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 has different amounts of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. Protruding forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a loosely curved planar shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look like volumes similar to each other (see FIG. 19), but the left front When viewed from the top, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240 and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is hardly visible, and can give different impressions depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1 It is supposed to be. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be made to look like a pachinko machine with different models, the player etc. The appeal to the player can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted to the player's attention.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left and right asymmetrical, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in multiple rows in the left and right direction in the island facility of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island facility looks super solid An alternative appearance (atmosphere) can be provided to give the player a rhythmic impression by alternately arranging right side decoration units 200 and left side decoration units 240 of different forms to suppress turning-off. It is possible to make the player's attention strongly by raising the appeal of the player.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. , 254 b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 60 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, and 322 on which an LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210a and 250a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, while the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 The circumferential lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth and loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a between the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 is disposed.

  Further, the door frame 5 is on the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, and the left side upper decoration substrate 254. And the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is disposed, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front of each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256 ing.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high luminance. It is supposed to be an LED. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed at the upper right end of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b emitting light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the door frame 5 at the top of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center in the left-right direction. It is formed to decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the lateral direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282 b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central annular lens portion 282 b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extended thereto. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered by the upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282 b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally beyond the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. The upper central decorative substrate 288 has a plurality of LEDs 288 a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288 b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282 b mounted on the front, and the upper central lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282 b And can be separately lighted and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front face, and it is possible to make each extension frame lens portion 282c emit light and decorate respectively . The LEDs 288 a, 288 b and 290 a of the upper central decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-like curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In the dish unit 300, the upper dish decoration substrate 322 is disposed on the back side of the upper dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper dish decoration substrate 322 An upper dish right upper decoration member 319 for decoration of the right side portion and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball release button 341 can be luminously decorated. In this example, the LEDs 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 are full color LEDs.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, a radially extending group 104 (FIG. 59 and FIG. 60) radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right-side decoration unit 200 is used as a notification group 105, and this LED 214c is made to emit light as appropriate. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Moreover, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b in the upper decorative unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper central group 106 is an upper central group 106 for light emission decoration. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288 a and 288 b of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It can be made to emit light decoration that becomes a point. In addition, the LEDs 290 a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282 c in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 corresponding to the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 arranged under the game window 101 It is considered as the dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation unit group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be obtained. It is possible to notify the player.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108 and 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  Also, the twenty LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, the upper side 105a and the lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Furthermore, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper tray group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d at the front and rear and left and right. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a and 432d are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a and 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong, are further provided with three independent RGB systems to emit full color light. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems that are three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness, so Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into green LED and red LED, and belongs to two system 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Accordingly, the actual number of systems in light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and the respective LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with the LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 With the LEDs of the second ring group 103 disposed outside the display, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to entertain the player and make it interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Also, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, the lines 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are appropriately lit to emit the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to have a light effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104 By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of Further, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210 b and 250 b) circulate.

  In addition, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player comes to a chance or a specific gaming state (eg, a big hit gaming state, a low probability non-shorting state, a high probability non-shorting state, It is possible to perform a light emission effect that suggests low probability time short state, high probability time short state, and the like.

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, it is possible to perform light emission effect to embellish the upper plate 301 or to emit light in association with the operation group 109. A light emission effect can be performed to prompt the user to operate the unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109 c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that urges the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Also, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side which protrudes to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. In a state where the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 98 etc. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is suspended from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game balls to be distributed. The body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game balls distributed in the ball removal passage 741 d in the winning ball device 740 will be described later in detail. It is distributed.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the front from the lower end A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642a and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Ball hitting launcher]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass while the 658 is made passable The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose circular arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

  In the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 (firing solenoid 654) according to this embodiment, when the handle device 500 is operated (if maintained), 100 gaming balls are sequentially fired at a constant interval in one minute. It is driven so as to reach the target launch speed (pace). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the operation of the handle device 500 is performed (maintained), gaming balls are successively hit in the gaming area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of a winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a flow passage of balls in the winning ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 that pays out based on the instruction and a gaming ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the gaming ball Mainly comprises a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a laterally elongated box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view of a horizontally elongated 721 and an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes in a rectangular shape only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) from the bottom wall 710 in plan view; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 , A rod-like shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, a base portion of the shaft portion 725 near the base end and outer circumferential wall 722 on both front sides Awarded at 720 Ball Base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) opened downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, passes the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 through the slit 734a, and is inside the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 c of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 A sensor base 753 and a prize ball relay board 754 relaying the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 Have.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 in between, and a supply channel earth that can contact gaming balls circulating in the supply channel 741 a of the unit base 741 A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and for grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be detachably supported on the unit base 741 A detachable button 759 is provided.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and is present in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the presence / absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the out-of-ball switch 741e. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball breakage switch 741e (ball breakage state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hole is that the ball breakage. It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated. It is possible to

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748 a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, etc. is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the ball withdrawal switch 860b is operated, or the like. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side, and together with the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The sheet can be discharged to the outside on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 at 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full-tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the upper center in the front-rear direction. And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. Prize ball socket 771 for receiving gaming balls having flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball socket 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79) The game ball having flowed through the normal passage 773 and the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from the position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receptacle 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79) A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game balls received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game balls distributed through the ball removal passage 778 are released forward to the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball that has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is placed on the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be made to correspond without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning bowl device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount of the game ball in the full tank branch unit 770 Even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 may be different, so that the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the open / close crank 793 and the open / close operation piece 542g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction A plurality of longitudinally elongated slit-shaped through holes in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate base unit 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Also, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side favorably by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the substrate unit 800 is literally provided with the speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby reversing the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and moving forward. The speaker box is designed as a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deep bass to the aperture of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is removed from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 844 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately provided. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving of the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is Interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to be performed easily. Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654, and reaches the life On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced. And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 receives the gaming balls discharged upward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the gaming board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, and Ejecting passage 842 and the front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward and the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The back side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed and flows through the main frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. The game balls flowed down and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described later in detail, pass through the discharge passage 842 behind the pachinko machine 1 Can be discharged into the

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the Here, as shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply board box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the standing wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  Power supply substrate box 850 and power supply substrate holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of speaker box 820. When mounted, the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case without the standing wall portion 850b Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. And 86, a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 161) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the substrate base 871 of the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is open. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 88, in the assembled state, the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 The needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the (rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. It can be

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 5 such that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 5 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side) The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, main side relay terminal board 880 and peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of main body frame base 600. As well as connecting terminals for connecting with the door frame 5 side only through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connecting terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, etc. Is supposed to be on the back side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. The through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. Located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 included in the unit so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted well. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw 924 straight against the back cover fastening hole 770b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 resiliently engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end right from the front end of the side plate 952a Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller amount of projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 108). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 of the game board 4 and the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 108).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See FIG. 108). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. Also, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the crime prevention side plate 950 on the side (axial support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is made to extend backward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a becomes long. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the whole of the crime prevention side plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being bent forcibly and cheating .

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent It can be reduced as much as possible, and a security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3 I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for glass door and the sliding door for main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view are attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure which makes it difficult for the user to tamper with the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part and lower part of both side faces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with sliding levers 1040 for door frame and By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B), it swings (clockwise direction in FIG. 97).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting restriction protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are vertically penetrated in the left and right direction on the front side of the restriction protrusion 1031 are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The sliding door 1040 for a door is provided with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame that protrudes toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding wedge 1040 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the lower middle of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the rivet long hole 1042 at the top The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a sliding door wedge. It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016. To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 The pieces 1043 are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned with each other and overlapped. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the slide for the main frame while letting the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 pass through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 in a combined state. After inserting the wedge 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud preventing member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the opening 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding frame 1050 for the main frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size in the horizontal and vertical directions of the game board 4 is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and can exhibit the same effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to form a prize ball base rear wall portion 710b. Transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the game machine and gaming balls discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction And a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main frame base 600, the rear surface of which is behind the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane, the rear of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine capable of visually recognizing the side and the back side, and easily checking the back side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 covering the back side of the game board 4 It can be one.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facilities where the game machine 4 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the gaming board using the gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc., and FIG. 104 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front component of the embodiment different from that of the example of FIG. 103 etc. and seen from the front, and FIG. 107 is a gaming board showing FIG. FIG.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and will be described in detail later, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150 It is further provided (see FIGS. 110 to 116 and the like).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The outer periphery of the play area 1100 is divided by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow to the lower end of the game area 1100. Are guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower side of the back of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and fastening each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4 B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and within the range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a table unit 2000 is attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component 1110 It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the side at the left end of the rear wall in the rear view in the rear wall. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 in between, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c or the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like come to the rear side. Incidentally, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170, Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of an unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than by visual observation, and a pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance is provided. It can be done.

[1-4 E. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 For the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and for the first special lottery result which is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and received by the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as and the second starting opening 210 disposed on the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 To the right of the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery results drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 and comprising two LEDs lined up and down.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate unit 2301 by the game ball is An ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and an ordinary lottery result arranged by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2301 arranged under the ordinary symbol storage indicator are displayed as an ordinary symbol The special symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for the purpose, and the normal special symbol storage indicator 1188 are arranged side by side to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" when the "big hit" And a round indicator 1190 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern 2103.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By combination, it becomes possible to display various gaming states (for example, low probability short time, short time, high probability short time, high probability time short, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.) ing.

  In addition, when the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reservations is four It blinks together. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after being changed for a predetermined time according to the fluctuation pattern, and is stopped by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the 7-segment LED stopped. The player can recognize the lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by the game ball passing through the gate unit 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  Further, when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol indicator 1189, the start of the variation display is suspended It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the stored standard symbols. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with a four-round indicator lamp 1190a consisting of a predetermined LED and a sixteen-round indicator lamp 1190b. The number can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 161). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk or the like in the hall can be made to recognize the position of the display portion 1181 without confusion To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as those described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110 And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 1100, and the synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic board. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000 such as the attachment unit 2100 or the center character 2500 etc. The attachment unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. Further, the front inner peripheral surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3010 c (see FIG. 155 etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, the fixing portion 3010 c can be prevented from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4, can be used as the main unit frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3010 c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the accommodation recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and open at the lower end side. A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting The panel plate 1210 can be set in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, and the cost for implanting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component member]
Next, a front component 1110A different from the front component 1110 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. In the game panel 1200, the substrate holder 1160 and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 106 and 108, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example shown in FIGS. 103 to 105, except for the difference.

  The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 106 and 107 is different from the above-described front component 1110 in that it has a function display unit 1180 other than a part of the inner circumferential shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The points are very different. The other configuration is the same as that of the front component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit Prepared for 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component 1110A has a frame-like inner circumferential shape extending clockwise in a front view from the out-out guide surface 1115 up to the stop 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed in the same shape as the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the shape from the stopper 1114 to the out-port guiding surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component 1110 ing. More specifically, the section from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right sticker sheet sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc, and from the lower end of the arc to the outlet. It is formed in the shape of a straight line inclined so that the distance up to the guiding surface 1115 is lower toward the out-port guiding surface 1115.

  The front component 1110A of this example can secure the game area 1100 more widely as compared with the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the player can be more entertained by the wide game area 1100. It can be done.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the game panel 1200 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1110A, but the present invention is not limited to this. FIGS. 100 and 100 are shown on the rear side of the front component 1110A. A game panel 1150 consisting of a single plate as shown at 101 may be attached.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 108 and FIG. FIG. 108 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 109 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 108, the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front and rear direction. A plate-like side piece 952a which forms a side of the main body frame 3 and a front end which extends inward in a substantially perpendicular direction (open side) from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is axially supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and cheating is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950 so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a rigid side, It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change. When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those should be outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 110 to FIG. FIG. 110 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the front right, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the left front. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and the game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110A for partitioning and forming the inner periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a rear of the front component 1110A are attached to close the game area 1100 and have a predetermined shape corresponding to the game area 1100 And a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having a plurality of openings 1158 (see FIG. 114 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100.

  The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of wood plywood such as a plywood.

  In addition, the game board 4 is attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, the back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150, and the back unit 3000 from the player side A liquid crystal display device 1900 attached visibly and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower portion of the back surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 from the back side, and a back surface of the substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is an pachinko machine at the bottom of the right end of the attacker unit 2100, which is arranged to extend right from the top of the out port 1151 in the lower part of the game area 1100. The function display unit 1180 is attached at a position where it can be viewed to the player side from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to 1 and can display the gaming state etc. and the inner periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 And a frame-shaped center character 2500 disposed substantially in the center of the game area 1100.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and the front side is opened, and an opening 3010 b through which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces in the front and back direction is formed in the back wall 3010 a. A back box 3010, a back horizontal rendering unit 3100 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and both sides, and a back rendering unit 3300 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010; And an under-back effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010.

  In addition, although the details will be described later on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that accommodates a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 161) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150. A box 1910 and an inverter substrate box 1920 housing an inverter substrate 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight are provided.

  In the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming area 1100 is divided into right and left by the center combination 2500 attached to the game panel 1150, and the outer periphery of the right combination of the center combination 2500 and the game Between the inner circumference of the area 1100 (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A) and a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, the outer circumference of the left side of the center character 2500 and the inside of the game area 1100 Between the circle (the inner circumference of the front component 1110A) is a large area where the game balls can be circulated sufficiently, and in the area on the left side and the lower side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, the game panel 1150 A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front of the.

  When the game board 4 of this example strikes a game ball to the right of the center character 2500 (strikes with a predetermined strength or more), the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100 passes through the right outer periphery of the center character 2500. It flows down to the guide passage member 2142 and is guided to the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 and discharged from directly above the gate portion 2105 downward, so that the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2105 with extremely high probability. There is. That is, the game ball can be easily made to enter the gate unit 2105 by performing so-called right strike.

  Further, although details will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIG. 130, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126 in a short time state, the ordinary lottery result is extremely short. Since the lottery is to be executed, if the result of the ordinary lottery is "hit", the movable piece 2106 retreats and the game ball can be received into the second starting opening 2102, and to the gate unit 2105 The game ball which has entered is made to win as it is to the second starting opening 2102. When the normal lottery is "losing", the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2105 is released to the upper side of the special winning opening 2103. Therefore, by performing a right strike, it is possible to play a game aimed directly at the second start opening 2102 and the big winning opening 2103.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is hit to the left side of the center character 2500 (so-called left hit), the game balls are guided in the direction of the front side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2100 by the plurality of obstacle nails placed. It is possible to win a game ball on the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, the general winning opening 2104 and the like. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the warp entrance 2504 linked to the stage 2510 of the center character 2500 and the game ball enters the warp entrance 2504, the game ball is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center work 2500, the stage The game balls supplied to 2510 can roll horizontally on the stage 2510 to enjoy a movement different from the movement caused by the obstacle nail, and the game balls enter the game area 1100 from the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2510. Once released, it is possible to win a prize at the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 with high probability.

  As described above, in the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, different impressions can be played on the right and left sides of the center character 2500, so that various games can be provided to make it hard to get bored. It is possible to

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged to extend right above the out port 1151 at the lower center of the game area 1100 and to the right, and is supported by the front of the game panel 1150. The front side unit 2200 attached to the front end of the front view at the right end in front view, the front side unit 2200 disposed on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming area 1100, and the approximate center of the gaming area 1100 And a frame-shaped center character 2500 disposed on the right side of the game area and supported by the game panel 1150.

  Although details will be described later, the attacker unit 2100 in the table unit 2000 pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls upon receipt of gaming balls, and at the same time, receives a first special opening result 2101 and a second special lottery result. The starting opening 2102, large winning opening 2103 for paying out a predetermined number of gaming balls by accepting the gaming balls while being able to receive gaming balls according to the special lottery result, and the predetermined number of gaming balls by receiving the gaming balls It has a general winning opening 2104 to be paid out, and a gate unit 2105 from which a predetermined ordinary lottery result is drawn with passing of a game ball as a trigger.

  The first starting opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 in this example can always receive the game ball. Also, the second starting opening 2102 and the special winning opening 2103 are variable winning openings capable of changing to a state in which the game ball can be received and a state in which the game ball can not be received. The second start port 2102 can be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the game ball to the gate unit 2105, and the big winning port 2103 can be the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. It becomes possible to receive according to the special lottery result which is drawn on the occasion of the reception of the game ball to.

  The first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 of the present example is disposed on an axis (directly above the out port 1151) passing through the center of the gaming area 1100 right below the stage 2510 of the center character 2500. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the second starting opening 2102 is provided with a first passage 2122a (guide route) through which the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2105 is guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2106. In the second unit 2120 configured as one unit (prize ball device), it is arranged to be on the lower right side in a front view than the first starting opening 2101. Furthermore, the special winning opening 2103 is disposed below the second start opening 2102 and on the right side in front view with respect to the first start opening 2101 so that the left end is substantially directly below the second start opening 2102. Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is disposed on the upper right side in a front view than the first starting opening 2101. Further, the gate unit 2105 is disposed immediately above the second start opening 2102 on the upper right side in a front view with respect to the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100.

  The front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 has three general winning openings 2201 arranged on the left side in front view of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2201 at the front left side than the general winning opening 2201 although details will be described later. The game apparatus has a shelf 2202 capable of guiding the gaming ball having flowed down the left side of the center part 2500 in the area 1100 in the front view to the right.

  Furthermore, the center character 2500 of the front unit 2000 is attached to a large opening 1158 formed substantially at the center of the game panel 1150 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window 2501 that can be viewed from the player side. The center role 2500 includes a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 a in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a peripheral wall portion 2503 that prevents the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 from entering the frame. A warp inlet 2504 opened at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp outlet 2505 discharging gaming balls entering the warp inlet 2504, into the frame, and a gaming ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 rolled in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing the ball into the game area 1100 and returning it to the game area 1100 later.

  The stage 2510 of the center character 2500 is disposed immediately above the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and the gaming balls released back into the gaming area 1100 from the chance outlet 2514 of the stage 2510 have a high probability. It can be received into the first starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 130. FIG. 118 is a front perspective view of the attacker unit, and FIG. 119 is a rear perspective view of the attacker unit. Further, FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after the attachment to the main unit, and FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit after the attachment of the main unit. Furthermore, FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the attacking unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first unit in the mounting, after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit in the attacker unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the second unit in the attacker unit as exploded and the rear. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the attacking unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the third unit in the mounting case after the disassembly. Further, FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth unit in the attacker unit, as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 130 is a front view showing a part of the attacker unit by cutting it.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the front unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side to the opening 1158 formed at the lower part in the middle in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. It is fixed. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of receiving openings (prize openings) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first start opening 2101 disposed immediately above the out opening 1151 of the game panel 1150 and capable of always receiving the game ball, and the position on the right side and slightly lower than the first start opening 2101 in front view A second start opening 2102 (see FIG. 130), a large winning opening 2103 located below the second start opening 2102 and to the right of the first start opening 2101 in a front view, and a first start opening 2101 And a second start opening 2102 and a general winning opening 2104 disposed slightly above the first start opening 2101.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a gate unit 2105 from which the result of the normal lottery is randomly selected, triggered by the passage of the game balls. The gate portion 2105 is disposed on the right side and a slightly upper side of the general winning opening 2104 in a front view, substantially directly above the second start opening 2102 (see FIG. 130).

  As shown in the figure, the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is in a state where it can always receive the gaming ball. Also, the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130) is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is a plate that can be advanced and retracted in the front-rear direction with respect to the opened opening. The movable piece 2106 is shaped like a circle. The second start port 2102 can not receive the game ball when the movable piece 2106 is in the forward state, and can receive the game ball when the movable piece 2106 is in the reverse state, so-called, It is considered as a variable winning opening.

  In addition, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is a horizontally long rectangular shape having a length of 4 to 6 times the length of the gaming ball in the front view left and right direction and a length slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball in the vertical direction. And a plate-like opening / closing member 2107 which can open and close the opened opening. The opening and closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2103 can be rotated about the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the opening and closing member 2107 becomes substantially vertical, the game ball can not be received, and the opening and closing member 2107 is substantially horizontal. When it becomes a state, it becomes possible to receive a game ball, and it is considered as a so-called variable winning opening.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100, like the first starting opening 2101, is opened upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is ready to receive the gaming ball all the time. ing. In addition, the gate unit 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed so that the game balls can flow in the vertical direction with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls.

  More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 according to the present embodiment has a first unit 2110 having a first starting opening 2101 and a large winning opening 2103, a second starting opening 2102, and a gate unit 2105. The second unit 2120, the third unit 2130 having the general winning opening 2104, the fourth unit 2140 to which the function display unit 1180 is attached, the first unit 2110, the second unit 2120, the third unit 2130, and the fourth unit Unit base 2150 supporting 2140 from the rear side, attached to the rear side of unit base 2150, and connection between the attachment solenoid 2113, start port solenoid 2124, count sensor 2114, second start port sensor 2125, and panel relay board 3025 Ata to relay And mosquitoes unit relay board 2160, and a.

  The first unit 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 has a first starting opening 2101 and an opening 2111a facing the large winning opening 2103. The first base 2111 is a plate-like base attached to the front of the game panel 1150; A box-shaped first member mounted on the rear side of the first base 2111 and having a large winning opening 2103 so as to face the large winning opening 2103 from the opening and rotatably supporting an opening / closing member 2107 for opening and closing the large winning opening 2103 A case 2112, an attachment solenoid 2113 supported in the first case 2112 for driving the opening and closing member 2107 to open and close, and a count sensor 2114 supported in the first case 2112 and detecting a game ball received in the big winning opening 2103 And a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the first case 2112 Is provided with a winning hole decorative substrate 2115, the.

  In addition, the first unit 2110 is disposed on the front side of the first base 2111 at the front side of the first base 2111 and at the front side of the middle object detection sensor 2116. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front and mounted at positions corresponding to the middle induction decoration member 2117 having a predetermined decoration and the middle object detection sensor 2116 and the middle induction decoration member 2117 behind the first base 2111 And an in-the-deck decorative substrate 2118. The first unit 2110 is attached to the unit base 2150 via the first base 2111.

  The first base 2111 of the first unit 2110 is integrally formed with a first starting opening 2101 which protrudes from the front of the game panel 1150 to the front (within the game area 1100) and is opened upward and backward. In a state of being attached to the game panel 1150, the position is extended to a position substantially coinciding with the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Thereby, the gaming ball received by the first starting opening 2101 can be guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150.

  The first case 2112 of the first unit 2110 has a box shape whose front side is open, and is divided into upper and lower cases by an upper case 2112 a and a lower case 2122 b. Further, the first case 2112 is internally provided with a discharge port member 2112 c which discharges the gaming ball received by the special winning opening 2103 and detected by the count sensor 2114 downward from a predetermined position. The first case 2112 is formed of a translucent material, guides light from the large winning opening decoration substrate 2115 disposed on the rear side to the opening and closing member 2107 side, and the inside of the large winning opening 2103 and the opening and closing The member 2107 can be decorated to emit light.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the adder solenoid 2113 of the first unit 2110 is supported by the first case 2112 so that the plunger can advance and retract in the left and right direction. The attachment solenoid 2113 can rotate the open / close member 2107 by means of a link member 2113 a connected to the tip of a plunger that moves back and forth by energization. Although not shown, the attachment solenoid 2113 is provided with a spring for urging the plunger to move forward (project), and the open / close member 2107 closes the winning opening 2103 while the plunger is advanced. It is supposed to be in position. That is, in this example, when the solenoid solenoid 2113 is energized, the plunger retracts (is inserted), and the open / close member 2107 is rotated from the closed position to the open position so that the game ball can be received into the big winning opening 2103 It has become.

  The middle object detection sensor 2116 of the first unit 2110 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, although detailed illustration is omitted, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the middle object detection sensor 2116 are arranged in the left and right direction, and the front surface of the middle object detection sensor 2116 moves in the upper and lower direction than the object moving in the left and right direction. Objects are easier to detect.

  The middle induction decoration member 2117 of the first unit 2110 is decorated on the front with an arrow pointing downward in a circle, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration on the rear side of the front decoration extends backward A light shielding member 2117a in the form of a cylindrical frame is provided. As a result, the inside and the outside of the arrow can be illuminated and decorated differently by the in-adjacent decoration substrate 2118 disposed on the rear side of the middle induction decoration member 2117.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 is a plate-like second base 2121 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a front of the second base 2121 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 (within the game area 1100) A passage forming member 2122 which protrudes to form the second starting port 2102 and the gate portion 2105 and a movable piece 2106 attached to the rear side of the second base 2121 and opening and closing the second starting port 2102 are supported slidably in the front and rear direction A second case 2123 and a start port solenoid 2124 supported in the second case 2123 and for opening and closing the movable piece 2106 are provided.

  The second unit 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 is supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and is received by the second starting opening 2102 as shown in FIGS. 124 and 130. A second starting opening sensor 2125 for detecting, a gate sensor 2126 for detecting gaming balls supported by the second base 2121 and the second case 2123 and passing through the gate portion 2105, and disposed on the rear side of the second base 2121 And a light shielding member having a plurality of openings disposed between the second start opening decorative substrate 2127 and the second base 2121 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. And 2128.

  In addition, in the second unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100, a normal symbol display 1189 consisting of two LEDs is configured at a predetermined position on the front surface of the second base 2121 to constitute a part of the function display substrate 1191 mounted on the front surface. A normal symbol display substrate 1191a is attached.

  As the second base 2121 of the second unit 2120 is shown together in FIG. 124, substantially the entire front surface is formed into a flat surface along the surface of the game panel 1150, and cooperates with the passage forming member 2122 Then, it is possible to form a passage through which game balls can flow on the front side. Further, the second base 2121 is provided with a passage hole 2121a penetrating in the front-rear direction in which the game ball can pass in the lower left corner in a front view, and a concave portion 2121b recessed in a curved shape near the upper right corner in the front view . Further, the second base 2121 is an opening through which the plate-like movable piece 2106 can pass, a sensor supporting portion 2121 c for supporting the second start port sensor 2125 and the gate sensor 2126, and a substrate for supporting the ordinary symbol display substrate 1191 a A support 2121d and a wall 2121e extending forward from the front end of the substrate support 2121d and covering the right side of the normal symbol display 1189 are provided. Note that the second base 2121 is formed of a translucent material. Further, the second base 2121 is adapted to be attached to the unit base 2150.

  As the passage forming member 2122 of the second unit 2120 is also shown in FIG. 124, the shape in front view has a portion extending in the vertical direction and a portion extending in the left direction from the lower end thereof. It is formed in an L shape. The passage forming member 2122 has a first passage 2122a which enables the game ball to flow in the vertical direction and has an upper end and a lower end opened at the position of the portion extending in the vertical direction in the front view. In addition, the passage forming member 2122 enables the game ball to flow in the left and right direction at the position of the portion extending in the left and right direction of the front view, and opens upward at the position where the right end substantially opposes the lower end opening of the first passage 2122a. A left end is closed second channel 2122b. The first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122 are vertically spaced apart from each other by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The passage forming member 2122 is a plate-like wall portion 2122c connecting the lower end of the right side wall in the front view in the first passage 2122a and the right end of the right end opening of the second passage 2122b. A right outlet 2122d opened on the right side in front view of the passage 2122a and through which gaming balls can pass, and a right shelf 2122e shortly extended from the lower end of the right outlet 2122d toward the right in front view; The wall 2122c is formed on the opposite side across the first passage 2122a by the lower end of the left side of the first passage 2122a in front view and the upper end of the second passage 2122b, and the left discharge portion 2122f through which gaming balls can pass, and the left discharge portion A left shelf portion 2122g which is continuous with the lower end of 2122f and is formed on the upper side of the second passage 2122b and is inclined downward to the left in the front view, and the inside of the first passage 2122a And a, a guide wall 2122h projecting rearwardly from the front wall at a height position definitive right outlet 2122d are formed.

  In the passage forming member 2122, the upper end opening of the first passage 2122 a is a gate portion 2105, and the right end opening of the second passage 2122 b is a second starting port 2102. In addition, the passage forming member 2122 can support the gate sensor 2126 at a position substantially above the right discharge port 2122 d at the approximate center of the first passage 2122 a in the vertical direction, and flows through the first passage 2122 a. The game ball being played can be detected by the gate sensor 2126.

  Further, as the passage forming member 2122 is also shown in FIG. 130, the right end side opening of the second passage 2122b extends forward from the front surface of the second base 2121 in the assembled state as the second unit 2120. It is formed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 2106 to be provided, and the right end side opening is a second starting port 2102. As a result, as long as the movable piece 2106 does not move backward, the movable piece 2106 prevents the game ball from being received by the second starting opening 2102. The gaming ball thus blocked is released from the second unit 2120 through the left shelf 2122g from the left outlet 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b, and then to the large winning opening 2103. It will be headed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is received in the second start port 2102 by the movable piece 2106 moving backward, the game ball flows down the second passage 2122 b and is detected by the second start port sensor 2125. Ru. After that, the gaming ball is discharged from the left end of the second passage 2122b through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 on the rear side to the rear side (rear side of the game panel 1150) of the second unit 2120. It will be discharged.

  Further, the passage forming member 2122 can cover the front side of the normal symbol display substrate 1191a attached to the front surface of the second base 2121 at a portion below the right shelf 2122e.

  In the second passage 2122b of the passage forming member 2122, the bottom wall located immediately below the right end opening in the front view is formed in an arc shape, and the gaming ball having passed through the right end opening (second start opening 2102) is smoothed. It can be distributed in the left direction. The guiding wall 2122 h formed in the first passage 2122 a of the passage forming member 2122 is disposed at a position corresponding to the recess 2121 b of the second base 2121 and is inclined in an arc shape so as to be lower toward the rear. The gaming ball having passed through the upper end opening (gate portion 2105) of the first passage 2122a can be smoothly guided into the recess 2121b of the second base 2121.

  The second case 2123 of the second unit 2120 is in the form of a box whose front side is open, and can be divided up and down by the upper case 2123 a and the lower case 2123 b. The upper case 2123 a and the lower case 2123 b The movable piece 2106 can be slidably supported in the front-rear direction between them. In addition to the movable piece 2106 and the starting port solenoid 2124, the second case 2123 transmits the movement of the plunger advancing and retracting in the vertical direction of the starting port solenoid 2124 to move the movable piece 2106 forward and backward. , Support inside.

  The start port solenoid 2124 of the second unit 2120 is supported by the second case 2123 to move the plunger forward and backward, and in a normal state (during non-energization), the plunger protrudes downward. In this normal state, the movable piece 2106 protrudes forward relative to the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2124, and to the second start port 2102. It is in the state where the acceptance of the game ball of is stopped. On the other hand, when the starting port solenoid 2124 is energized, the tip of the plunger is raised so as to be retracted, and the movable piece 2106 is further rearward than the front surface of the second base 2121 via the link member 2129 connected to the tip of the plunger. It will be set back so that the game ball can be received into the second starting opening 2102.

  The second unit 2120 is provided with a plurality of rectangular openings 2128a aligned in the left-right direction with the light shielding member 2128, and each opening 2128a of the light shielding member 2128 is provided on the front surface of the second starting opening decorative substrate 2127. The LEDs are mounted in a corresponding manner, and light emission decoration can be performed for each opening 2128a.

  In the second unit 2120, when the gaming ball enters the first passage 2122a from the upper end opening (gate portion 2105), after passing through the gate sensor 2126, the recessed portion of the second base 2121 by the guide wall 2122h inclined to the rear. After being once sent into the chamber 2121 b, the inside of the recess 2121 b returns to the inside of the first passage 2122 a again and flows down onto the second starting port 2102. In the first passage 2122a, the game ball is made to meander by the guiding wall 2122h and the recess 2121b, and the flow-down speed of the game ball is attenuated to move the movable piece 2106 or the second passage disposed downstream. It is possible to reduce the impact when it abuts on the 2122a.

  Thus, in this example, as also shown in FIG. 130, passage of the gate portion 2105 is detected by the gate sensor 2126, and when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2126, A normal lottery is performed, and a predetermined normal lottery result is drawn. If the lottery result is a hit, the movable piece 2106 is retracted from the front of the second base 2121 by driving the start opening solenoid 2124, the second start opening 2102 is opened, and the game ball can be received, The gaming ball having flowed down from the first passage 2122 a enters the second passage 2122 b through the second start port 2102. Then, the gaming ball having entered the second passage 2122b circulates in the front view left direction by the arc-shaped bottom wall, and after being detected by the second starting opening sensor 2125, rearward from the left end of the second passage 2122b It is discharged (discharged) to the rear side (rear side of the game panel 1150) of the second unit 2120 through the passage hole 2121a of the side second base 2121. In this example, the time from when the gate sensor 2126 detects the passage of the gaming ball until the movable piece 2106 is slid by driving the starting opening solenoid 2124 and the gaming ball can be received into the second starting opening 2102 And a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds to 1 second), and if the result of a normal lottery when in a time saving state is a hit by such an operation of the movable piece 2106, it becomes a trigger of the lottery The game ball is to be received into the second starting opening 2102. In addition, the drive of the start port solenoid 2124 in the short time state is driven only for a predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds) with respect to one hit, and the start port when a predetermined time has elapsed The driving of the solenoid 2124 is finished, the movable piece 2106 slides forward, and the second start port 2102 is in a closed state.

  On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery that has been drawn is a loss, the start hole solenoid 2124 is not driven and the movable piece 2106 remains in the forward moving state, and the gaming ball having flowed down from the first passage 2122a is the movable piece 2106 As a result, the entry into the second starting port 2102 is blocked. The gaming ball blocked by the movable piece 2106 from being received into the second starting opening 2102 flows from the left outlet 2122f between the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b to the left shelf 2122g, and left It is released from the left end of the shelf 2122g (into the game area 1100 in front of the game panel 1150). The movable piece 2106 is inclined so that the upper surface is lower on the front left side, and even if the game ball is to stay on the movable piece 2106, it rolls naturally in the left direction of the front view by the inclination. It is discharged from the outlet 2122f to the left shelf 2122g.

  In the second unit 2120, the gaming ball may be released from the right discharge port 2122d in the first passage 2122a depending on the state of the gaming ball flowing through the first passage 2122a, and may be discharged from the right discharge port 2122d The game balls are released from the right end of the right shelf 2122e into the game area 1100 through the right shelf 2122e.

  Further, the third unit 2130 of the attacker unit 2100 has a general winning opening 2104 which can be in contact with the front of the game panel 1150, and has a through hole 2131a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the right side of the general winning opening 2104 in front view The third base 2131 and a lens member 2132 inserted from the rear side to the through hole of the third base 2131 and attached to the third base 2131 and having translucency, and disposed on the rear side of the lens member 2132 And a gate decoration substrate 2133 on the front surface of which an LED is mounted.

  The third base 2131 of the third unit 2130 is integrally formed with a general winning opening 2104 which protrudes from the front of the gaming panel 1150 to the front (within the gaming area 1100) and is opened upward and backward. In a state of being attached to the panel 1150, it extends to a position substantially coinciding with the rear surface of the game panel 1150. The third base 2131 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The gate decoration substrate 2133 of the third unit 2130 can emit light and decorate the inside of the through hole of the third base 2131 by the lens member 2132 by making the LED mounted on the front face emit light in an appropriate color. . The gate decorative substrate 2133 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The fourth unit 2140 of the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-like fourth base 2141 to which the function display board 1191 is attached on the lower rear surface, and is attached to the upper front of the fourth base 2141 A guide passage member 2142 having a guide passage 2142a which protrudes to the front (into the game area 1100) than the front face of the door 1150 (inside the game area 1100) and guides the game ball in the left and right direction. A right object detection sensor 2143 attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141 and a right guiding decoration member 2144 attached to the guide passage member 2142 with a predetermined decoration so that the front surface is exposed forward on the right side of the right object detection sensor 2143 And have.

  The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 has a triangular shape in a front view, and the oblique side at the left end has an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100. Further, the fourth base 2141 is formed with a plurality of through holes 2141a in the lower part thereof, in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the function display substrate 1191 respectively face. The fourth base 2141 of the fourth unit 2140 is attached to the unit base 2150.

  The guide passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 extends along the upper side of the fourth base 2141 in the left-right direction, the right end in the front view is opened upward, the left end is opened downward, and the guide passage 2142 is open Is equipped. The guide passage 2142 a of the guide passage member 2142 is closed on the front side and open on the rear side, and is closed by the front side of the fourth base 2141 on the open rear side. The guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2142 is inclined so that the left side in the front view is low.

  In the assembled state, the guide passage 2142a of the guide passage member 2412 is positioned such that the right end in a front view approaches the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and flows down along the right inner periphery of the game area 1100. The game ball which has been done is to enter inside from the right end opening. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, in the guide passage 2142 a of the guide passage member 2412, the left end in the front view is bent downward, and the left end side opening opened downward in the assembled state as the attacker unit 2100 is the gate portion 2106. It is formed to be located immediately above (the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120). In the guide passage 2142a and on the front surface corresponding to the guide passage 2142a in the fourth base 2141, ridges extending in the vertical direction are alternately arranged in the left-right direction, and the gaming balls are longitudinally moved in the guide passage 2142a. It is made to be able to meander and to attenuate the flow velocity. Further, the left end side opening of the guide passage 2142a and the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a are separated by a distance slightly longer than the outer diameter of the gaming ball.

  The right object detection sensor 2143 of the fourth unit 2140 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. In the present example, the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the right object detection sensor 2143 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the right object detection sensor 2143 moves in the horizontal direction more than an object moving in the vertical direction. Objects are easier to detect. In addition, the fourth unit 2140 includes a sensor cover 2145 that covers the front side of the right object detection sensor 2143 and is attached to the front surface of the fourth base 2141.

  The right guide decorative member 2144 of the fourth unit 2140 is decorated on the front face with a right-pointing arrow arranged in a circle. On the rear side of the right guiding decorative member 2144, a cylindrical frame-shaped light shielding member 2146 is provided, with a wall along the decorative shape of the right guiding decorative member 2144 extending rearward. As a result, by the back lower right decoration substrate 3021 of the back unit 3000 disposed on the rear side of the right guiding decoration member 2144, it is possible to make the inside and the outside of the arrow emit light in different modes.

  The unit base 2150 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is open. In addition, the unit base 2150 is provided with a discharge port 2150 a that receives the gaming balls having passed through the passage holes 2121 b of the second base 2121 in the second unit 2120 and discharges them from the rear surface of the unit base 2150 to the rear.

  In a state where the attacker unit 2100 of this example is disposed in the gaming area 1100, the first starting opening 2101 is positioned immediately above the out opening 1151 across the middle induction decoration member 2117 at the substantially horizontal center of the gaming area 1100. The special winning opening 2103 is positioned approximately at the center in the left-right direction between the first starting opening 2101 and the right inner periphery in the game area 1100.

  The first start port 2101 is located immediately above the out port 1151 and directly below the chance exit 2514 of the stage 2500 of the center part 2500 described later in detail. As a result, the game balls released from the chance outlet 2514 can be received with high probability at the first start port 2101. The gaming balls received in the first starting opening 2101 are sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150 and then sent to the middle guiding passage 3071 of the back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 described later. There is.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2100 supports the function display unit 1180 so as to be located on the right side in front view of the special winning opening 2103 and the right end (right end of the function display unit 1180) is within the right side in the game area 1100. It is supposed to be located slightly inside (left side) from the circumference. As a result, the gaming balls having flowed down from above along the right inner periphery of the gaming area 1100 fall onto the guiding passage member 2142 of the fourth unit 2140 in the attacker unit 2100, and the guiding passage 2142a opens upward at the right end. It is supposed to enter inside. The game ball entering the guide passage 2142a is guided leftward in a front view by the guide passage 2142a, and is discharged downward directly above the upper end opening of the first passage 2122a in the second unit 2120, that is, the gate portion 2105. ing. The gaming ball discharged downward from the opening on the left end side of the guide passage 2142 a enters the gate portion 2105 with extremely high probability.

  The game ball having entered the gate portion 2105 of the attacker unit 2100 is guided rearward by the guiding wall 2122 h of the passage forming member 2122 after the passage is detected by the gate sensor 2126 disposed in the first passage 2122 a, and the second It enters into the recess 2121 b of the base 2121. The gaming ball having entered the recess 2121 b is guided forward at the lower end of the recess 2121 b and abuts on the rear surface of the front wall of the passage forming member 2122 to flow downward. That is, in the first passage 2122a of the attacker unit 2100, the gaming ball having passed through the gate portion 2105 is always guided to the movable area of the movable piece 2106 while meandering and flowing down in the front-rear direction.

  In this example, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 and is detected by the gate sensor 2126, a normal lottery is immediately performed, and the selected normal lottery result is displayed instantaneously on the normal symbol display 1189. When the selected normal lottery result is a hit, the starting opening solenoid 2124 is driven to move the movable piece 2106 backward, and the game ball can be received into the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, the game ball having passed through the gate unit 2105 can be accepted to the second starting opening 2102 with a very high probability when a hit is drawn as a normal drawing result.

  Then, the gaming ball received in the second start opening 2102 enters the second passage 2122 b from the second start opening 2102, is sent in the left direction of the front view, and is detected by the second start opening sensor 2125. The path is changed from the left end of the second passage 2122b to the rear, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the passage hole 2121a of the second base 2121 and the discharge port 2150a of the unit base 2150. .

  When the normal lottery result is a loss, the gaming ball discharged downward from the first passage 2122a abuts on the movable piece 2106 closing the second starting opening 2102, and the first passage 2122a and the second passage 2122b Between the left outlet 2122f and the upper left shelf 2122g of the second passage 2122b, and after rolling the left shelf 2122g leftward in a front view, the inside of the game area 1100 from the left end of the left shelf 2122g It is discharged to the upper area of the big winning opening 2103 in.

  In addition, according to the special lottery result which is selected by the game ball being accepted in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the attacker unit 2100 (for example, "4R normal big hit", "4R latent positive big hit" , "16R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit", "8R probability variation big hit", "16R probability variation big hit", etc., the attacker solenoid 2113 in the first unit 2110 is driven in a predetermined pattern, and the attacker solenoid By the drive of 2113, the open / close member 2107 is pivoted from the closed position where it is upright to the open position where it is almost horizontal, so that it is possible to receive the game ball into the big winning opening 2103. The gaming ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward of the attacker unit 2100 after being detected by the count sensor 2114 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1150.

  Furthermore, the backer unit 2100, after guiding the gaming ball received by the general winning opening 2104 disposed between the first start opening 2101 and the gate portion 2105 to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150, is a back unit to be described later. The back right guiding member 3060 at 3000 is fed from the upper opening 3061 into the right guiding passage.

[2-3. Table side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the gaming board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 (a) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 (b) is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is the inner periphery of the game area 1100 at a position closer to the lower side from the center in the vertical direction on the left than the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 on the panel board 1210 of the game panel 1150 It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 so as to be in contact with (the right side surface in a front view of the inner rail 1112).

  As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and is lined up substantially along the arc from the right end of the front view It mainly includes three general winning openings 2201 and a shelf 2202 disposed at the upper left than the three general winning openings 2201 and inclined so that the right end side is lower. The front end side of the three general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200 extends forward relative to the front face of the game panel 1150, the rear end side extends rearward relative to the rear face of the game panel 1150, and the upper and rear sides are opened. In the game area 1100, it is formed so as to always receive a game ball.

  The shelf 2202 of the front side unit 2200 is disposed at a position such that the left end is substantially in contact with the left inner periphery of the gaming area 1100, and has flowed down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 in the gaming area 1100. The gaming ball can be guided to the right.

  The front side unit 2200 is attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and has a plate-like unit base 2210 having three general winning openings 2201 and the front of the unit base 2210 and protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1150 And a left object detection sensor 2212 which is disposed under the right end of the shelf 2202 on the right side in a front view of the guide member 2211 and attached to the front of the unit base 2210. The left guide decoration member 2213 attached to the guide member 2211 with a predetermined decoration so that the front surface is exposed forward on the left side of the left object detection sensor 2212 and the rear side of the unit base 2210 and the front side is opened A shallow box-like transparent unit cover 2214;

  The unit base 2210 of the front side unit 2200 has a plate-like portion abutting on the front of the game panel 1150 and a frame-like portion extending backward from the plate-like portion and inserted into the corresponding opening 1158 in the game panel 1150 It has a part, and is attached to the game panel 1150 at a plate-like part. The unit base 2210 has a shallow relief decoration on its front surface and is formed to be partially translucent.

  The guide member 2211 of the front side unit 2200 is shaped like a substantially inverted triangle in a front view, and is a shelf 2202 linearly inclined such that the upper side is lower on the right side. The guide member 2211 has a circular through hole into which the left guide decorative member 2213 is inserted at substantially the center.

  The left object detection sensor 2212 of the front side unit 2200 includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, although detailed illustration is omitted, and can detect an object located within a predetermined range in front. ing. In this example, the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the left object detection sensor 2212 are arranged in the vertical direction, and the front surface of the left object detection sensor 2212 moves in the horizontal direction more than an object moving in the vertical direction. Objects are easier to detect.

  The left induction decorative member 2213 of the front side unit 2200 has a decoration in which a left arrow is arranged in a circle on the front surface, and a wall along the outer periphery of the decoration extends to the rear on the back side of the front decoration A light shielding member 2213 a in the form of a cylindrical frame is provided. In the attached state, the rear end of the light blocking member 2213a extends to a position slightly ahead of the rear surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, by the LED of the back lower left decoration substrate 3020 in the back unit 3000 disposed on the back side of the left guide decoration member 2213, the light emission decoration can be performed in different modes from the inside to the outside of the arrow.

  The unit cover 2214 of the front side unit 2200 has an outer shape substantially the same as the frame-like portion of the unit base 2210, and in the attached state, the rear end is formed at a depth slightly ahead of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 ing. The unit cover 2214 has a through hole through which the light shielding member 2213a of the left guiding decorative member 2213 can be inserted, and the rear end of the light shielding member 2213a is directed rearward.

  The front side unit 2200 of the present embodiment can guide the gaming ball having flowed down the left side of the center prize 2500 in the gaming area 1100 to the right by the shelf 2202 and is further downstream than the shelf 2202 The game ball can be received by the three general winning openings 2201 arranged in the. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 of the front side unit 2200 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1150, passes through the left opening 3072 of the back left guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 to be described later It is supposed to be delivered.

[2-4. Center feature]
Subsequently, the center product 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 144. Fig. 132 is a perspective view of the center character viewed from the upper right front, Fig. 133 is a perspective view of the center character viewed from the lower left front, and Fig. 134 is a perspective view of the center character viewed from the rear is there. FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of a center part disassembled into major members and seen from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the center pieces disassembled into major members and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the front right central rendering unit of the center character viewed from the front, and FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the front right central rendering unit of the center prize viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the front right-hand rendering unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the front-right central rendering unit disassembled and seen from the rear.

  The center character 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side to the opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate the approximate center of the game panel 1150 and then fixed to the front of the game panel 1150 As shown in FIG. 110, etc., it is provided with a large window portion 2501 in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 penetrating in the back and forth direction and disposed on the rear side is a frame shaped like a frame occupying most of the game area 1100. ing.

  The center character 2500 has a frame-shaped unit base 2502 having a flange 2502 a that can contact the front of the game panel 1150 on the outer periphery of the window 2501, and bulges forward from the unit base 2502 approximately in the left-right direction It has a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding the game balls flowing down in the game area 1100 as a boundary to the left and right and preventing the game balls from entering the inside of the frame (in the window 2501). A part of the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed by the unit base 2502.

  In addition, the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2504 (see FIG. 112) opened to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 and into which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 1100 can enter and the warp entrance 2504 Warp outlet 2505 for releasing the gaming ball into the frame, and after rolling the gaming ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the left and right direction, released into the gaming area 1100 above the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501.

  Furthermore, the center character 2500 is disposed on the rear side of the peripheral wall 2503 and is a transparent plate-like partition member 2520 that closes the window 2501, and on the left and lower sides of the window 2501 in front view on the rear side of the peripheral wall 2503. A center lower decoration substrate 2521 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front, a center decoration substrate 2522 on the rear of the peripheral wall 2503 above the window 2501 and a plurality of LEDs on the front, and a unit An upper flange member 2523 attached to the upper left portion in a front view at the rear surface of the base 2502 and forming a part of the flange portion 2502; a left rear decorative member 2524 attached to the left side in the front view at the rear surface of the unit base 2502; And.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is disposed on the right side of the stage 2510 in a front view, and the game ball is received by the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) changes The display start condition is satisfied but the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) has not been satisfied yet (the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol)) The variation display end, big hit gaming state end) number of holdings of the special symbol which is the establishment number of start condition (the number of first special symbol holding number, the second special symbol holding number), and the game ball passes the gate part 2105 The start condition of the variable display of the is satisfied, but the start condition of the variable display of the normal symbol is not satisfied yet (The previous variable display of the normal symbol ends, the big hit gaming state end) Number of pattern holdings) The displayable number indicator 2530, the center decoration member 2540 provided with the number indicator 2530 and attached to the front of the unit base 2502 and decorating the front of the unit base 2502, the peripheral wall on the upper side of the window 2501 A front effect unit 2550 which is arranged at 2503 and has decoration of a predetermined logo along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and which can be lighted and decorated by the on-center decoration substrate 2522, and arranged on the right side of the window 2501 in front view It is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the front right movable decoration 2610 in the front right middle rendering unit 2600 having the front right movable decoration 2610 movable according to the state (special lottery result) and the front right middle rendering unit 2600. And a front right outside rendering unit 2700 having a predetermined decoration.

  The stage 2510 of the center product 2500 is supplied with gaming balls discharged from the warp outlet 2505 and can be rolled in the left-right direction, and the first stage 2511 capable of releasing the supplied gaming balls forward from a predetermined position The game balls are provided on the front side of the first stage 2511 and can be supplied with game balls from the first stage 2511 and can be rolled in the left and right direction, and the supplied game balls can be released into the game area 1100 in front of the predetermined position. Second stage 2512, chance entrance 2513 where game balls can be entered from a predetermined position on second stage 2512, and gaming balls entered at chance entrance 2513 from a position lower than second stage 2512 from game area 1100 And a chance outlet 2514 capable of being released inward.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is then formed so that the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area 1100 is high. It is formed in a letter-like wave shape. The first stage 2511 is formed at a raised portion at the center in the left-right direction, and the width is reduced toward the front while the width in the left-right direction is widened. The first stage 2511 is lowest at both left and right sides of the center release 2511a. And a side release portion 2511 b which is formed in the portion and which becomes lower toward the front and whose width in the left-right direction is wider than that of the central release portion 2511 a.

  In the first stage 2511, the front end other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be released forward from other than the central discharge portion 2511a and the side discharge portion 2511b . Further, the first stage 2511 extends in the right direction so that the right end in the front view looks into the number-of-retentions display 2530 side.

  The second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so as to extend in the left-right direction so as to straddle the two side discharge parts 2511 b in the first stage 2511 and to lower the center in the left-right direction. In the second stage 2512, the center in the left-right direction is slightly higher. The second stage 2512 is formed at a central guide 2512 a formed at the central position in the lateral direction and having a width decreasing in the lateral direction while decreasing in the rearward direction, and a lowermost portion on both lateral sides of the central guide 2512 a. And a side discharge portion 2512 b whose width in the lateral direction is wider than that of the central guide portion 2512 a. In the second stage 2512, the front end other than the side release portion 2512b protrudes upward, and it is difficult for the game ball to be released forward from other than the side release portion 2512b.

  The chance inlet 2513 in the stage 2510 opens forward in the vertically extending wall-like portion formed between the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512, and the central guide 2512 a in the second stage 2512. It is located behind the Thereby, when the gaming balls rolling on the second stage 2512 are guided to the rear by the central guiding portion 2512a, they enter the chance entrance 2513.

  The chance outlet 2514 in the stage 2510 is formed to open forward at a position below the center of the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction in the flange portion 2502a. The chance outlet 2514 is provided with a pair of ridges extending in the front-rear direction and separated in the left-right direction in a passage communicating with the chance inlet 2513. Thus, the gaming balls discharged from the chance outlet 2514 are released into the game area 1100 in a state in which the swing in the left and right direction is suppressed by being guided forward by the pair of protrusions. There is.

  The stage 2510 of the center character 2500 is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in a state where the chance outlet 2514 is assembled, and the gaming ball is in the game area 1100 from the chance outlet 2514 When it is released, it can be received by the first starting port 2101 with high probability.

  In addition, the stage 2510 of the center character 2500 is formed substantially entirely of a transparent member, and can be lighted and decorated by the under-centre decoration substrate 2521. The first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are integrally formed by a stage member 2515 and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2502.

  In addition, the number-of-holds display 2530 of the center character 2500 includes a number-of-holds display substrate 2531 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front, and a plurality of LEDs of the number-of-holds display substrates 2531 A grid-shaped light shielding member 2532 for partitioning, a light guiding member 2533 disposed in each grid of the light shielding member 2532 and guiding light from the LED of the hold number display substrate 2531 to the front, and each light guiding member 2533 to the front A front cover 2534 having a plurality of openings facing the light shielding member 2532, and a front cover 2534, a light shielding member 2532, and an upper surface cover 2535 covering the upper side of the hold number display substrate 2531 are provided.

  As illustrated, the upper surface cover 2535 of the number-of-retentions display 2530 is inclined so that the left end in the front view is lowered, and is formed in an arc shape in which the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. The upper surface cover 2535 is disposed between the stage 2510 and the front right middle rendering unit 2600 (front right middle movable decoration 2610), and the gaming ball deviates from the stage 2510 to the front right middle rendering unit 2600 side. Can also be returned to the stage 2510 side. Upper surface cover 2535 is integrally formed with unit base 2502.

  Although the front effect unit 2550 of the center character 2500 is omitted about the details of the decoration, the front decoration member 2551 having a translucent shape and a shallow relief formed in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1; A plate-like diffusion light guide member 2552 disposed on the front side of the front decoration member 2551 and capable of diffusing light, and a logo decoration substrate 2553 disposed on the upper side of the diffusion light guide member 2552 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the bottom surface And. The diffusion light guide member 2552 and the front decoration member 2551 are attached to the front of the unit base 2502. The front effect unit 2550 can emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting the LED of the logo decoration substrate 2553.

  The front right middle rendering unit 2600 of the center character 2500 has a fixed decorative body 2620 formed in a circular shape in a front view and a toroidal rotary decorative body 2630 which is rotatable around the outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620. It is arranged on the back of the front right middle decoration board 2640 which is arranged on the back side of the right middle movable decoration 2610, the front right middle movable decoration 2610, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front right middle decoration substrate 2640 The rotary drive mechanism 2650 for rotationally driving the rotary decorative body 2630 of the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right, the rotary drive mechanism 2650, the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right, and the decorative substrate 2640 in the front right are supported A base member 2660 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position on the side, and a rotation for rotating the base member 2660 within a predetermined angular range Is provided with a moving mechanism 2670, the. The base member 2660 is rotatably supported by a support pin 2601 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2502.

  The fixed decorative body 2620 in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right in the front right is transparent. And a disc-shaped rear decorative body 2622 having a light transmitting property, which is disposed inside the front decoration 2621 and whose front is bulging forward than the front of the front decoration 2621 and in which a predetermined character is embossed on the front. And. In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted at a position on the rear side of the rear decoration 2622 on the front right in the decoration substrate 2640 so that the rear decoration 2622 and the front decoration 2621 can be made to emit light. There is.

  In addition, the fixed decorative body 2620 further includes a light shielding member 2623 having a plurality of partition pieces 2623a arranged on the outer periphery of the front decorative body 2621 and radially projecting in the circumferential direction. In addition, the front decoration 2621 of the fixed decoration 2620 includes a plurality of lens portions 2621 a that protrude radially from the outer periphery and are respectively disposed between the partition pieces 2623 a of the light shielding member 2623. The lens portion 2621a of the front decoration 2621 has a star-shaped tip. The partition piece 26223 a and the lens portion 2621 a of the fixed decorative body 2620 are positioned inside the rotary decorative body 2630. In addition, an LED is mounted at a position on the rear side of the lens portion 2621a, and the decorative substrate 2640 on the front right can emit and decorate the star-shaped tip of the lens portion 2621a. .

  The front decoration 2621 of the fixed decoration 2620 is attached to the base member 2660 through the annular spacer member 2624 while holding the rear decoration 2622, the light shielding member 2623, and the decoration substrate 2640 in the front right. It has become.

  In the front right, the rotary decorative body 2630 of the movable decorative body 2610 is formed in an annular shape, and a predetermined decoration is formed three-dimensionally on the surface, and the decorative parts penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. In addition, the rotary decorative body 2630 is formed in a state in which the rear side and the inner peripheral side are opened, and the lens portion 2621a of the front decorative body 2621 in the fixed decorative body 2620, the light shielding member 2623, and the decorative substrate 2640 in the front right It is supposed to be inserted inside. The rear end of the rotary decorative body 2630 extends rearward of the decorative substrate 2640 in the front right, and can be rotated relative to the base member 2660 by being attached to an annular operating gear 2654 of a rotary drive mechanism 2650 described later. It is supposed to be supported by

  The rotary decorative body 2630 can emit light and decorate the light by appropriately emitting an LED positioned behind the lens portion 2621 a of the front decorative body 2621 in the front right middle decorative substrate 2640.

  The rotary drive mechanism 2650 of the front right central rendering unit 2600 is mounted on the base member 2660 at a position above the rotary decoration 2630 via the motor base 2665, and the rotary drive mechanism 2650 of the front drive motor 2651. A drive gear 2652 fixed to the rotation shaft, a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the drive gear 2652 and rotatably supported by the base member 2660, and a transmission gear 2653 meshed with the base member 2660 and rotatably supported And an annular operating gear 2654 to which the rotating decoration 2630 is attached.

  The front first drive motor 2651 of the rotational drive mechanism 2650 is attached to the front side of the motor base 2665, and the rotation axis extends through the motor base 2665 to the rear side. Further, the drive gear 2652 and the transmission gear 2653 are disposed between the motor base 2665 and the base member 2660.

  The operating gear 2654 of the rotational drive mechanism 2650 has a circular guide hole 2654a centrally penetrated in the front-rear direction. The operation gear 2654 is disposed between the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624, and is rotatably supported via a bush 2656 pivotally supported by the base member 2660 and the spacer member 2624 in the guide hole 2654a. .

  In addition, the rotational drive mechanism 2650 is provided with a rotational position detection sensor 2655 capable of detecting the rotational position of the rotary decorative body 2630. The rotational drive mechanism 2650 is provided with a plate-like detection piece 2652a extended outward to the drive gear 2652, and the rotational position of the rotary decorative body 2630 is detected by detecting the detection piece 2652a with the rotational position detection sensor 2655. Can be detected.

  The base member 2660 of the front right central rendering unit 2600 is formed to cover the rear side of the movable decorative body 2610 and the rotary drive mechanism 2650 in the front right. The base member 2660 is an arm 2661 extending upward from a portion supporting the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right, and a bearing formed at the tip of the arm 2661 and supported rotatably relative to the unit base 2502 A slit 2663 which is formed on the arm portion 2661 between the portion 2662 and the bearing portion 2662 and the portion supporting the movable decoration 2610 in the front right and extends along the radiation passing through the center of the bearing portion 2661 and penetrates in the front and back direction And have. The base member 2660 is configured such that a support pin 2601 attached so as to extend rearward on the rear side of the unit base 2502 is inserted into the bearing portion 2662, and is rotatably supported by the support pin 2601. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the motor base 2665 mounted on the front side of the base member 2660 is provided at the lower end corresponding to the lower side of the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right with a guide piece 2664 extending in an arc shape centering on the bearing portion 2662 . The guide piece 2664 has a plate-like portion extending in the front-rear direction at an outer peripheral end centering on the bearing portion 2662, and is in an arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. It is supposed to be inserted into the As a result, when the base member 2660 is rotated by the guide piece 2664, swinging in the front-rear direction is suppressed.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right central rendering unit 2600 is positioned on the extension of the right side of the first stage 2511 in the front view of the stage 2510. Thereby, when the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right is turned from the normal position to the appearance position by the turning drive mechanism 2670 in the left direction in front view, the guide piece 2664 is positioned such that it covers the upper portion of the right end of the first stage 2511 (See FIG. 157), and even if the game ball bounces to the right from the first stage 2511, the game ball can be prevented from contacting the rotating decoration 2630 of the movable decoration 2610 in the front right. . Therefore, the game ball is splashed off by the rotating decorative body 2630, so that it is possible to prevent the player's sense of distrust from being impaired due to the original movement of the game ball, and the game of the player It is possible to suppress the decline in interest to

  In the guide piece 2664, the left end side surface in the front view is inclined so that the left end is lower. Accordingly, when the movable decorative body 2610 is in the normal position in the front right, the lower end of the rotary decorative body 2630 is formed by the left end of the guide piece 2664 and the arc-shaped groove formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. Since a space capable of accommodating the gaming ball can be formed, movement of the gaming ball by accommodating and holding the gaming ball in the aforementioned space should the gaming ball deviate in the right direction from the right end side of the first stage 2511 Can be stopped, and the game ball can be prevented from moving differently from the original.

  In addition, the game ball accommodated and held in the above-mentioned space moves the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right from the normal position to the appearance position in the left direction of the front view (rotation) so that the left end of the guide piece 2664 is inclined. By the side surface that has become, it rolls in the left direction (direction of the first stage 2511) and is sent back to the stage 2510. Therefore, depending on the speed at which the movable decorative body 2610 is moved from the normal position to the appearance position in the front right, it is possible to fly the gaming ball accommodated and held at the left end of the guide piece 2664 to the stage 2510 side (FIG. 158) See), so the player can be shown a different movement from the movement of the gaming ball rolling the stage 2510 within the frame of the center character 2500, and the player enjoys the movement of the gaming medium and the interest is reduced Can be controlled.

  The rotary drive mechanism 2670 of the front right central rendering unit 2600 includes a front second drive motor 2671 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 so that the rotation axis extends in the front-rear direction, and a rotation axis of the front second drive motor 2671 A fixed disk-shaped link wheel 2672 and a link pin 2673 supported at a position eccentric to the rotation axis of the link wheel 2672 and slidably inserted into the slit 2663 of the base member 2660 are provided.

  Further, the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is provided with a rotation position detection sensor 2674 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 2502 and detecting the rotation position of the movable decoration 2610 in the front right through the base member 2660. The rotational position detection sensor 2674 is attached at a position where it can detect the right end in a front view of the guide piece 2664 of the motor base 2665 attached to the unit base 2660.

  In the rotary drive mechanism 2670, when the link wheel 2672 is rotated by the front second drive motor 2671, the link pin 2673 revolves on the circumference of a predetermined radius, and the link pin 2673 revolves. As the link pin 2673 slides in the slit 2663, the link pin 2673 presses the inner wall of the slit 2663 in a predetermined direction, and the base member 2660 rotates around the bearing portion 2662 (support pin 2601). There is.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 2670, the link pin 2673 is disposed between the bearing portion 2662 of the base member 2660 and the movable decoration 2610 in the front right, so the movable decoration in the front right is larger than the revolution diameter of the link pin 2673. The 2610 can be moved a lot. In the front right central rendering unit 2600 of this example, the movable decoration 2610 in the front right is located on the right side in a front view of the window 2501 by the rotational movement mechanism 2670, and the front view center side of the window 2501 It can be rotated between the appearance position located at

  The link wheel 2672 of the rotation drive mechanism 2670 is located on the front side of the partition member 2520, and a part of the outer peripheral surface is in the window 2501 (see FIGS. 112 and 133). Thus, a worker for maintenance or the like can touch the outer periphery of the link wheel 2672 from the front side of the center character 2500 (game board 4) to rotate the link wheel 2672, so that the base member 2660 (movable decoration in front right) Even if a failure occurs in which the body 2610) stops at a rotational position other than the predetermined position, the link wheel 2672 can be rotated from the front side to return the base member 2660 to the normal position without disassembling the center part 2500. It is possible to simplify the time and effort required for maintenance, etc., and to reduce the time to interrupt the game as much as possible due to the occurrence of a problem, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game It can be done.

  Further, although a detailed illustration of the rendering unit 2600 in the front right of the center character 2500 is omitted, the support pin 2601 (bearing portion) is in the normal position where the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right is positioned to the rightmost in front view. The support pin 2601 and the link wheel 2672 are arranged such that a vertical line passing through the center of the ring 2662 passes between the center of the link wheel 2672 and the link pin 2673. Thereby, the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right can be turned further to the left in the front view, and the appearance position of the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right is brought closer to the center to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the player. It can be done. When the movable decorative body 2610 is returned from the appearance position to the normal position in the front right, the link pin 2673 which revolves moves across the vertical line passing through the center of the support pin 2601, so the link pin 2673 is concerned After reaching the vertical line, while rotating to the normal position, a load from the movable decoration 2610 or the like in the front right acts on the link pin 2673 to apply a load to the second drive motor 2671 and the movable decoration in the front right Although the body 2610 may not be able to return to the normal position, as described above, the link pin 2673 is operated by rotating the link wheel 2672 which is partially exposed within the center character 2500 frame. The movable decorative body 2610 can be returned to the normal position by revolving around the front right.

  The front right outside effect unit 2700 of the center character 2500 is arranged on the lower side of the front right movable decoration 2610 with the front right inside of the front right movable decorative body 2610 in the normal position, and a front of the front right outer decorative unit The right middle lower decoration member 2710, the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711 disposed on the back side of the front right middle lower decoration member 2710 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the front right middle lower decoration member 2710 on the front Between the front right middle upper decoration member 2720 having different character decoration and disposed on the upper side of the front right movable decoration 2610, and between the front right middle upper decoration 2720 and the front right middle lower decoration 2710 An arc-shaped front right inner / outer periphery decorative member 2730 which is disposed so as to surround the right outer periphery of the fixed decorative body 2620 in the movable decorative body 2610 and whose width widens upward, a front right outer peripheral decorative member 2730 and a front right middle upper Of decorative members 2720 A plurality of LED on the front is disposed on the side is implemented as a table right in the outer peripheral decorative substrate 2733, and a.

  The front right inner lower lower decoration member 2710 of the front right outside rendering unit 2700 is formed so that the character part has translucency, and also protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1150 to be a part of the peripheral wall 2503 It is formed. The front right middle lower decoration member 2710 is attached to the front of the unit base 2502 at a position on the right side of the front view retention number indicator 2530 so as to sandwich the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711. The front right middle lower decoration member 2710 can emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the front right middle lower decoration substrate 2711.

  The top right middle upper decoration member 2720 is formed in a plate shape so that the character part has translucency, and is attached to the upper front surface of the middle right outer circumference decoration member 2730. The top right middle upper decoration member 2720 can emit light and decorate by appropriately emitting corresponding LEDs in the front right middle outer circumference decoration substrate 2733.

  The outer right outer periphery decorative member 2730 of the front right outer rendering unit 2700 has a circular arc shape whose width becomes wider as the outer shape goes upward, and a frame shape having a plurality of openings whose circumferential length becomes longer as going upward. It comprises a frame member 2731 and a translucent lens member 2732 which is provided on the rear side of the frame member 2731 and is inserted into each opening of the frame member 2731. The frame member 2731 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 2502, and the lens member 2732 and the front right outer periphery decorative substrate 2733 hold the frame member 2731 between the frame member 2731 and the unit base 2502. It is supposed to be In the front right middle outer peripheral decoration substrate 2733, LEDs are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective openings of the frame member 2731 so that light emission decoration can be performed for each opening (block portion of the lens member 2732) There is.

  In the center product 2500 of this embodiment, the outer periphery of the peripheral wall 2503 above and to the right of the approximate center in the left-right direction in front view is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component 1110A) In the state where it is shaped and attached to the game panel 1150, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the upper and right peripheral wall portions 2503 in the center character 2500. ing. As a result, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the gap on the outer periphery on the right side (so-called, hit right), it enters into the guide passage 2142a of the attacker unit 2100, and the gate has an extremely high probability. The game ball can be made to pass through the unit 2105.

  In addition, in the state where the center character 2500 is attached to the game panel 1150, an area of a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center character 2500 with the inner circumference of the game area 1100. . As a result, when the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the left side of the center character 2500, the game ball can flow down in a complex motion in that area, and a game can be performed to enjoy the movement of the game ball. It has become. In addition, since it becomes possible to make the game ball enter the warp entrance 2504 when the game ball is driven to flow down the left side of the center character 2500, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 As well as being able to increase the player's sense of expectation depending on whether or not the game ball released back to the game area 1100 from the stage 2510 is accepted to the first starting opening 2101 etc., the player can be entertained It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[2-4A. Second embodiment of fixed decoration in front right middle rendering unit]
Next, a second embodiment of the fixed decorative body 2620A in the front right central rendering unit 2600 of the center character 2500 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 141 to FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the second embodiment of the fixed decoration in the front right central rendering unit, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed decoration of FIG. FIG. 143 (a) is a perspective view of the front cover and effect sheet of the fixed decorative body of FIG. 141 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a view from the position slightly left of (C) is a perspective view seen from a position further to the left than (b). Fig.144 (a) is explanatory drawing which shows a structure of the effect sheet in the fixed decoration body of FIG. 141, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state at the time of light extinction, (c) is the light emission decoration aspect at the time of blue lighting It is an explanatory view showing, and (d) is an explanatory view showing a light emission decoration mode at the time of red lighting. In addition, about the member of the same structure, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The fixed decoration 2620A of this example is one that can be substituted for the front decoration 2621 and the rear decoration 2622 in the above-mentioned fixed decoration 2620. As shown in the figure, the fixed decorative body 2620A is disposed in a transparent front cover 2625 having a circular outer periphery and a front surface bulging forward and a shallow relief of a predetermined shape formed on the front surface, and the front cover 2625 And a diffusion lens sheet 2627 in the form of a thin sheet disposed on the rear side of the effect sheet 2626 and having a plurality of fine prisms, and a front cover disposed on the rear side of the diffusion lens sheet 2627 And a transparent disc-like holding member 2628 inserted into the inside of the H. 2625.

  In this fixed decoration 2620A, the effect sheet 2626 is composed of a translucent translucent smoke-colored base film and a colored layer formed on the back surface of the base film so that it looks blackish when viewed from the front side. (See FIG. 144 (b)). When viewed from the front, the fixed decoration 2620A has a relief-like decoration formed on the front cover 2625 on the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 (see FIG. 143). Thereby, when viewed from the front in a state where the fixed decorative body 2620A is not decorated with light emission, the relief of the front cover 2625 and the relief in the effect sheet 2626 and the distance between the front surface of the front cover 2625 and the front surface of the effect sheet 2626 As a result, the relief of the front cover 2625 will look more three-dimensional like a decoupage due to the difference of, and it is possible to present an unprecedented decoration to the player, as shown in FIG. 143 (b) and (c). In addition, since the appearance changes depending on the position where the player looks, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the fixed decoration 2620A, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the colored layer in the effect sheet 2626 has a black portion 2626a having almost no light transmission, a blue portion 2626b having a light transmission, It is composed of a light-emitting red portion 2626 c and an uncolored portion 2626 d which is not colored. As a result, when the LED located on the back side of the fixed decoration 2620A in the front right center decoration substrate 2640 is not lighted, the entire film becomes blackish due to the smoked color of the base film as shown in FIG. While the LED does not emit light, it emits light with a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (c) when emitting light in blue, and emits light as shown in FIG. 144 (d) when emitting light in red. ing.

  Specifically, when the colored layer of the effect sheet 2626 in the fixed decorative body 2620A overlaps the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d), the portion not included in any pattern is a black portion 2626a, and a portion included in any pattern is set as an uncolored portion 2626d. Also, when the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) are overlapped, the portion of only the pattern of FIG. 144 (c) is a blue portion 2626b and the pattern of FIG. 144 (d) The only part is the red part 2626c. Accordingly, when the LED emits blue light, light is transmitted through the blue portion 2626b and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the red portion 2626c, so the pattern shown in FIG. The imitation pattern) emits blue light. In addition, when the LED emits red light, light is transmitted through the red portion 2626c and the uncolored portion 2626d, and light is not transmitted through the black portion 2626a and the blue portion 2626b, so a pattern (letters as shown in FIG. The imitation pattern) emits red light. When the LED emits light in white, a pattern as shown in FIG. 144 (a) emits light.

  As described above, when the fixed decorative body 2620A does not emit light of the LED of the decorative substrate 2640 arranged on the rear side, the relief formed on the front cover 2625 is copied to the effect sheet 2626. While a certain decoration can be presented, different patterns can be displayed in a luminous manner in accordance with the color of the light emitted from the LED, and a variety of effects can be presented to the player to make it difficult to get bored. In addition, the relief of the front cover 2625 has substantially the same shape as the pattern to be displayed when the LED emits light in blue, thereby combining the relief of the front cover 2625 with the pattern to emit blue light. Can be granted.

[2-5. Overall configuration of back unit]
Subsequently, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 145 is a perspective view of the back unit on the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the back unit on the game board as viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 148 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main components and seen from the back is there.

  The back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the back side of the game panel 1150 and is open on the front side, and the back wall 3010 a has an opening 3010 b formed therein for the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to face in the front and back direction. It has 3010. The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape open at the front side and a substantially rectangular opening 3010 b penetrating in the front and rear direction in the back wall 3010 a, and extends outward from the front end outer periphery and is fixed to the back side of the game panel 1150 And a flange-like fixing portion 3010c. The opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the front view outline of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In addition, back box 3010 has a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d recessed in the outer periphery of opening 3010b on the rear surface of back wall 3010a and having a size substantially the same as the outer shape of liquid crystal display device 1900 and a back view at liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. A liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the right side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and a liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in back view) in the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. And a lock mechanism mounting portion 3010 f to which the The back box 3010 is configured such that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010 d, and the back surface in the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010 d of the back wall 3010 a is flat. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 abuts.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the back box 3010, mounting holes for mounting the rendering units 3100, 3300, and 3500, a substrate and a cover, and mounting bosses are formed at appropriate positions.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is attached at a position corresponding to the front side unit 2200 near the front end in the back box 3010 and at the front end in the back box 3010, a back lower left decorative substrate 3020 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. It is attached to the front of the back wall 3010a above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 mounted on the front lower back decoration substrate 3021 mounted at a position corresponding to the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front. The back upper relay substrate 3022, the back right relay substrate 3023 attached to the front of the back wall 3010a at the front view right of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back wall 3010a at the front view left of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 And a rear left relay substrate 3024 attached to the front surface.

  Furthermore, back unit 3000 is disposed on the right side in rear view of panel relay substrate 3025, with panel relay board 3025 attached to the lower rear corner of the rear wall 3010a of back box 3010 at the rear lower view below the opening 3010b. A first drive substrate 3026 attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in 3010, and a second drive substrate 3027 disposed on the right side of the first drive substrate 3026 in a back view and attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010 ing.

  Also, the back unit 3000 covers the rear side of the panel relay board 3025 and is mounted on the back box 3010 and is mounted on the back box 3010. And a second drive substrate cover 3032 that covers the rear side of the second drive substrate 3027 and is attached to the back box 3010.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is provided with a lock mechanism 3040 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the back surface of the back wall 3010 a of the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3040 of this embodiment is slidably attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010 f of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction, and when it is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is When the insertion slot that can be inserted from the side opens, and the locking mechanism 3040 is slid upward after inserting the fixing piece 1902 from the insertion slot, the rear end of the insertion hole is closed and the fixing piece 1902 does not come off As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a vertically extending plate-like back left holder 3050 attached near the front end at the left end in the back box 3010 and a second starting opening of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010 A back right guiding member 3060 attached at a position corresponding to 2102 and the general winning opening 2104 and capable of guiding the game ball, and three of the first starting opening 2101 and the front side unit 2200 of the attacker unit 2100 near the front end in the back box 3010 And a back left guiding member 3070 attached at a position corresponding to one general winning opening 2201 and capable of guiding the game ball.

  Also, the back unit 3000 is attached to a predetermined position of the back left holder 3050 and the back right guiding member 3060, and is attached to a predetermined position of the back left guiding member 3070, and a first start opening 2101. The first starting opening sensor 3081 capable of detecting gaming balls received by the player, and the gaming balls received at the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 attached to predetermined positions of the back right guiding member 3060 and the back left guiding member 3070 respectively And a possible general winning opening sensor 3082.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is a back horizontal rendering unit 3100 disposed over the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010, and a back up rendering unit 3300 disposed above the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010. And an under-back effect unit 3500 disposed below the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010.

  The back lower left decorative substrate 3020 of the back unit 3000 can emit light and decorate the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the front. In addition, the back lower right decorative substrate 3021 can emit light and decorate the guide passage member 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the front surface.

  The back upper relay substrate 3022 in the back unit 3000 is for relaying the connection between the first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 and the peripheral control substrate 4010. Further, the back right relay substrate 3023 is for relaying the connection between the first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 and the back horizontal relay substrate 3112 of the back right rendering unit 3100 R in the back horizontal rendering unit 3100, The back left relay substrate 3024 relays the connection between the first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 and the back horizontal relay substrate 3112 of the back left rendering unit 3100 L in the back horizontal rendering unit 3100.

  The panel relay board 3025 in the back unit 3000 is connected to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, or the main control board 4100 and the first start port sensor 3082, the second start port sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general winning port It is for relaying the connection with the sensor 3082, the gate sensor 2126, the start port solenoid 2124, the attacker solenoid 2113 and the like.

  The first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 in the back unit 3000 are based on the control signal (command) from the peripheral control substrate 4010, and each decoration substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, provided on the door frame 5 LED's mounted on 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., and the respective decoration substrates 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 522, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided on the game board 4 A dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 or each drive motor 3123, 3152, 3159, provided in the game board 4 based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010 or controlling light emission. It is for controlling the driving of 3302, 3506 and so on.

  The back left holder 3050 in the back unit 3000 is configured to support the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the warp inlet 2504 in the center character 2500 so as to guide the gaming ball to the warp inlet 2504 using a magnet. Fraud can be detected.

  The back right guiding member 3060 in the back unit 3000 is configured to support the magnetic detection sensor 3080 at a position corresponding to the first starting opening 2101 in the center character 2500, and the magnet is used to play the game ball in the first starting opening. It is possible to detect fraudulent activity that leads to 2101.

  The back right guiding member 3060 is disposed on the rear side of the second unit 2120 and the third unit 2130 in the attacker unit 2100, and the upper opening 3061 can communicate with the general winning opening 2104 on the front surface of the upper end. A middle opening 3062 capable of communicating with the second start port 2102 is provided at the front of the substantially central portion in the vertical direction. Although not shown, the back right guiding member 3060 is provided with a right guiding passage which extends from the upper opening 3061 to the lower end so that gaming balls can flow and the lower end is opened downward. The middle opening 3062 communicates with the middle of the right guiding passage, and game balls entering the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 are both discharged downward from the lower end by the right guiding passage.

  Thereby, the back right guiding member 3060 is received by the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 and the gaming ball guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the right guiding passage from the upper opening 3061. At the same time, the gaming ball received to the second start opening 2102 and guided to the rear side of the gaming panel 1150 is adapted to enter the right guiding passage from the middle opening 3062. In the back right guiding member 3060, a general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached at a position between the upper opening 3061 and the middle opening 3062 in the right guiding passage, and the gaming ball from the upper opening 3061, ie, the general winning opening 2104 Only can be detected.

  The back left guiding member 3070 in the back unit 3000 is such that it straddles the portion where the first starting opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 is arranged and the portion where the three general winning openings 2201 in the front side unit 2200 are arranged. It is to be placed behind. A middle guide passage 3071 which extends vertically in the right end of the front view and allows the game ball to flow and whose upper end can communicate with the first starting opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100, and a left side of the middle guide passage 3071 in front view There are three left openings 3072 formed on the front surface and capable of communicating with the respective general winning openings 2201 of the front side unit 2200.

  The lower end of the middle guide passage 3071 of the back left guide member 3070 is opened downward, and the open front side is closed by the rear surface of the attacker unit 2100. As a result, the gaming ball received by the first start opening 2101 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 1150 enters the middle guiding passage 3071 from the upper end, and is guided downward by the middle guiding passage 3071 and from the lower end It is discharged downward. A first starting opening sensor 3081 is attached near the upper part and the lower part of the middle guiding passage 3071 so that one game ball is detected twice. That is, although details are omitted, acceptance (winning) of the game ball to the first start port 2101 is determined based on the detection pattern of the detection signal of the game ball from the two first start port sensors 3081 If, for example, a detection pattern different from the preset regular detection pattern is detected, it is determined that an unauthorized action such as taking an unauthorized tool into and out of the first starting port 2101 is performed, for example. It is designed to perform predetermined game processing.

  Although not shown, the back left guiding member 3070 communicates with the three left openings 3072 on the left side in a front view of the middle guiding passage 3071 and has a left guiding passage at the lower end having a discharge port through which gaming balls can pass. Have. A general winning opening sensor 3082 is attached to the outlet of the left guiding passage, and one general winning opening sensor 3082 detects a game ball being received in any of the three general winning openings 2201. ing.

[2-6. Back side production unit]
Subsequently, the back side rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 149 to 156. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back side rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back side rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back side rendering unit disassembled into main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back side rendering unit disassembled into each main members and seen from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of one rotating decoration unit in the back side rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view of one rotating decoration unit in the back side rendering unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decoration unit of the back side rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decoration unit of the back side rendering unit disassembled and viewed from the back FIG.

  The back side rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is disposed on the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010, and is attached at the upper and lower sides of the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010. In the back-side rendering unit 3100, the back-right rendering unit 3100R disposed on the right side in front view of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the back-right rendering unit 3100R are formed substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction. The back left rendering unit 3100L, the back left rendering unit 3100L, and the back right rendering unit 3100R arranged on the left in front view can be moved independently in the left and right directions above and below the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010 And a back side slide unit 3150 disposed at the

  The back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L in the back side rendering unit 3100 are supported by the back side slide unit 3150 so that the upper end and the lower end can slide in the left and right direction, and the front with respect to the opening 3010 b of the front and back box 3010 The front of the back horizontal base 3110 can be covered by a longitudinally elongated box-shaped back horizontal base 3110 whose side facing the center in the left-right direction and the open front and center sides of the back horizontal base 3110 can be covered. Inside the box-shaped back horizontal base 3110 attached to the back horizontal decorative member 3111 attached to the back side, the vertically long back horizontal relay substrate 3112 mounted on the outside surface of the back horizontal base 3111 opposite to the open center facing side And three rotating decoration units 3120 mounted in a state of being vertically arranged in a row.

  The height of the back horizontal base 3110 of the back right rendering unit 3100 R and the back left rendering unit 3100 L is formed slightly higher than the height of the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010. The back horizontal base 3110 projects upward from the lower end and extends in the left-right direction as a slider mounting portion 3110a which protrudes upward from the upper end front surface and is connected to the lower end of the right connecting member 3157 or left connecting member 3162 of the back horizontal slide unit 3150 And a guided portion 3110b inserted and guided in the lower right guide member 3170R or the lower left guide member 3170L of the back side slide unit 3150. The back side base 3110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin.

  The back horizontal decoration member 3111 of the back right rendering unit 3100 R and the back left rendering unit 3100 L is a position corresponding to each rotation decoration 3126 of the three rotation decoration units 3120 mounted in the back horizontal base 3110. A plurality of notches 3111 a are provided such that the front side of 3126 and the side facing the center of the opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 face in the lateral direction. The back horizontal decoration member 3111 hides the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 which are positioned above and below the rotary decorative body 3126 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 in the region between the notches 3111 a. It can be done.

  Further, the back side decorative member 3111 has a plurality of shallow relief-like decorations on the front surface and a plurality of penetrations in the front-rear direction along the decoration at a position corresponding to the back side decoration substrate 3130 in the rotating decoration unit The opening 3111 b of Thus, light from the back side decorative substrate 3130 can be irradiated forward directly through the opening 3111 b of the back side decorative member 3111.

  The rotating decoration unit 3120 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is a plate-shaped lower base 3121 extending in the left and right direction, and the front of the opening 3010 b of the back box 3010 from the center in the left and right direction in the lower base 3121 A box-like upper base 3122 mounted on the upper side opposite to the side facing the center in the left-right direction and a back lateral rotation drive mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 3122 so that the rotation axis extends to the lower base 3121 side The drive gear 3124 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 3123 and the back side rotation drive motor 3123 and rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121, and meshes with the drive gear 3124 and has the same diameter as the drive gear 3124 A spur gear-like driven gear 3125 rotatably supported on the upper surface of the lower base 3121; It is attached to the upper base 3122 so as to be able to detect the rotational position of the rotary decorative body 3126 attached to the upper surface of the dynamic gear 3125 and having a bottomed cylindrical shape extending vertically and having a substantially square outer periphery and the rotary decorative body 3126 And a rotational position detection sensor 3127.

  In addition, the rotating decoration unit 3120 is inserted from above into the inside of the rotating decoration 3126 and has a semicylindrical lens member 3128 whose upper end is attached to the upper base 3122 and extends in the vertical direction, and the chord side of the lens member 3128 Mounted on a surface facing the lens member 3128 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface facing the lens member 3128, and mounted at the approximate center of the front surface of the upper base 3122 in the left-right direction And a back side decoration substrate 3130.

  The lower base 3121 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 is formed such that its length in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the rotary decorative 3126, and on the opposite side to the drive gear 3124 across the driven gear 3125 at both left and right ends. The end is formed in a semicircular shape substantially concentric with the axis of the driven gear 3125. The lower base 3121 includes a drive shaft portion 3121a rotatably supporting the drive gear 3124 and extending upward, and a driven shaft portion 3121b rotatably supporting the driven gear 3125 and extending upward. . The drive shaft portion 3121 a is inserted into a shaft hole (not shown) formed on the lower surface of the drive gear 3124. The driven shaft portion 3121 b is inserted into the shaft hole 3125 a penetrating the shaft center of the driven gear 3125 via the bush 3131.

  The upper base 3122 of the rotary decorative unit 3120 is disposed on the lower base 3121 from the center in the left-right direction to support the drive gear 3124, and the lower side and the driven gear 3125 side (the side facing the center in the left-right direction in the opening 3010b) is open The box-like main body 3122a, the standing wall 3122b extending upward from the opened driven gear 3125 side at the upper end of the main body 3122a, and the lower base 3121 from the upper end of the standing wall 3122b to the driven gear 3125 side And a top plate portion 3122c extending in parallel. In the rotating decoration unit 3120 of this example, a rotating decoration 3126 rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction is disposed between the lower base 3121 and the top plate 3122 c of the upper base 3122.

  The lower base of the main body 3122 a of the upper base 3122 is attached to the lower base 3121. In addition, the upper base 3122 is configured such that the back side rotation drive motor 3123 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 3122a. The upright wall 3122 b of the upper base 3122 extends higher than the back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123 attached to the main body 3122 a. The top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 has a semicircular tip at the end opposite to the standing wall portion 3122b, and the lens member 3128 is attached to the lower surface.

  An annular upper guide 3132 having a cylindrical guide cylinder (not shown) inserted inside the rotary decorative body 3126 is attached to the lower surface of the top plate 3122 c of the upper base 3122. ing. The upper guide 3132 has a diameter slightly smaller than the diameter of the inscribed circle of the rotary decorative body 3126, and the outer diameter of the guide cylinder inserted into the rotary decorative body 3126 is the upper end side of the rotary decorative body 3126 Can be rotatably supported.

  The drive gear 3124 of the rotating decoration unit 3120 has a shaft portion 3124a whose upper end is fixed to the rotation shaft of the back side rotation driving motor 3123 and extends downward, and a flat surface formed at the lower end of the shaft portion 3124a and meshed with the driven gear 3125. A gear-shaped gear portion 3124b, a detection piece 3124c fanned out in the direction perpendicular to the axis substantially from the vertical center of the shaft portion 3124a, and an axial hole recessed upward from the lower surface at the center of the gear portion 3124b (not shown) ) And. In this drive gear 3124, the shaft hole is inserted into the drive shaft portion 3121a of the lower base 3121 so that the rotational axis of the gear portion 3124b arranged far from the back side rotation drive motor 3123 is less likely to shake. It has become. The detection piece 3124 c is detected by a rotational position detection sensor 3127 mounted in the main body 3122 a of the upper base 3122, and the rotary decorative body 3126 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3124 c of the drive gear 3124. It is possible to detect the rotational position of the

  The rotating decoration 3126 of the rotating decoration unit 3120 is, as shown, formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape whose outer periphery extends in the vertical direction of a substantially square shape, and is assembled as the rotating decoration unit 3120. It is made rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, the center of which is a substantially axial center. The rotary decorative body 3126 has translucency and is provided with different decorations on four sides of the outer periphery.

  The lens member 3128 of the rotating decoration unit 3120 and the rotating decoration substrate 3129 in the assembled state have a length extending from the top plate portion 3122c of the upper base 3122 to the vicinity of the lower end of the rotating decoration 3126. The entire up and down direction 3126 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. Note that the lens member 3128 having a semicircular cross-section has a string direction extending in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (a plane parallel to the front of the game panel 1150), the left and right of the opening 3101b in the back box 3010 It is attached to the upper base 3122 in a state in which the direction center side is inclined so as to be retracted (for example, in a state of being inclined by about 30 degrees in plan view). As a result, the front face of the rotary decorative body decoration substrate 3129 attached to the string side of the lens member 3128 will face the player side so that the player can feel brighter when making the rotary decorative body 3126 emit light. It has become.

  The back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 of the rotating decoration unit 3120 is attached on the front side of the main body 3122 a of the upper base 3122 so as to extend to the upper end of the standing wall 3122 b. The back horizontal decoration substrate 3130 can emit light and decorate the back horizontal decoration member 3111 from the rear side by appropriately emitting the LED mounted on the front surface.

  Of the four faces on the outer periphery of the rotary ornament 3126 in the assembled state, as shown in the drawing, the rotary ornament unit 3120 of this embodiment faces the side opposite to the center side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. Except for the three sides can be exposed. In addition, the rotating decoration unit 3120 is configured such that the rear faces of the lower base 3121 and the upper base 3122 are respectively mounted in the back horizontal base 3110.

  The rotating ornament unit 3120 is formed symmetrically to the left and right for the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L.

  A back side slide unit 3150 of the back side rendering unit 3100 is mounted at a position above the opening 3010 b near the front end in the back box 3010 and extends horizontally in a substantially full width unit base 3151 and unit base 3151 The rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 is mounted on the upper rear surface near the right end of the front view and penetrates the unit base 3151 and the rotation axis extends forward, and the flat fixed to the rotation axis of the rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 A gear-like drive gear 3153, a spur gear-like first transmission gear 3154 rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side of the drive gear 3153 in a front view, and a first transmission gear 3154 The first transmission gear 3154 is rotatably supported by the unit base 3151 at a position on the left side in a front view. It has a second transmission gear 3155 in the form of a spur gear that meshes and a rack gear 3156a that extends in the left-right direction that meshes with the second transmission gear 3155. The unit base 3151 has left and right front surfaces lower than the second transmission gear 3155. A right connecting member having a plate-like right slider 3156 slidably supported in a direction and an upper end attached to the lower end of the right slider 3156 and a lower end attached to the slider mounting portion 3110a of the back horizontal base 3110 in the back right rendering unit 3100R And 3157.

  In addition, the back side slide unit 3150 includes a right slide position detection sensor 3158 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting the slide position of the back right rendering unit 3100R in the left-right direction. The right slide position detection sensor 3158 detects a slide position of the back right rendering unit 3100R through the right slider 3156 by detecting a detection piece (not shown in detail) provided on the right slider 3156. It is possible to

  Also, the back side slide unit 3150 is attached to the upper rear surface on the left side of the center of the unit base 3151 in the left and right direction in the front view and penetrates the unit base 3151 to extend the rotation axis forward. The drive gear 3160 in the form of a spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the back side left slide drive motor 3159, and the rack gear 3161a extending in the left-right direction meshing with the drive gear 3160, under the drive gear 3160 in the unit base 3151 An upper end is attached to a lower end of a plate-like left slider 3161 slidably supported in the lateral direction at the position of the side front and the lower end of the left slider 3161, and the lower end is a slider mounting portion of the back side base 3110 in the back left rendering unit 3100L. And left connecting member 3162 attached to 3110a.

  Furthermore, the back side slide unit 3150 includes a left slide position detection sensor 3163 attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3151 and capable of detecting the slide position of the back left rendering unit 3100L in the left-right direction. The left slide position detection sensor 3163 detects the slide position of the back left rendering unit 3100 L via the left slider 3161 by detecting a detection piece (not shown in detail) provided on the left slider 3161. It is possible to

  The back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the front of the unit base 3151 and includes a plate-shaped unit cover 3165 which covers the front sides of the drive gears 3153 and 3160, the right slider 3156, and the left slider 3161 and the like.

  Furthermore, the back horizontal slide unit 3150 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and is open at the top and extends in the left and right direction to guide the lower end of the back right rendering unit 3100R in the left and right direction. A lower guide member 3170R and a lower left guide member which is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and is open at the upper side and extends in the left and right direction and slidably guides the lower end of the back left rendering unit 3100L in the left and right direction. And 3170L. The lower right guide member 3170R and the lower left guide member 3170L are configured such that the guided portions 3110b of the rear horizontal base 3110 of the rear right rendering unit 3100R and the rear left rendering unit 3100L are slidably inserted from above. The back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L can be slidably guided in the left-right direction via the guided portions 3110b.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 in the back horizontal slide unit 3150 are formed from rack gears 3156a and 3161a formed to extend in the left and right directions at the upper end, and from the left and right direction end of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 A detection piece (not shown) extending upward in a plate shape, and a guide groove (not shown) open at the rear side and extending in the left-right direction and spaced apart in parallel in the vertical direction There is.

  The right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 are configured such that a plurality of rollers (not shown) rotatably supported on the front surface of the unit base 3151 are inserted into the guide grooves on the rear surface. Can slide in the left and right direction. Further, movement of the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the unit cover 3164 and the unit base 3151.

  The rear horizontal slide unit 3150 of the rear horizontal extension unit 3100 rotates the rear horizontal right slide drive motor 3152 and the rear horizontal left slide drive motor 3159 appropriately in the direction to set the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161 within a predetermined range. Can be slid independently in the left and right direction, and the back right rendering unit 3100 R and the back left rendering via the right connecting member 3157 and the left connecting member 3162 attached to the right slider 3156 and the left slider 3161. The unit 3100L can be slid in the left and right direction.

  The back side rendering unit 3100 according to the present embodiment can be rotated about an axis extending in the vertical direction by the back right rendering unit 3100 R and the back left rendering unit 3 100 L, which are disposed separately in the left and right direction in front view The rotary ornaments 3126 are coaxially arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and the rotary ornaments 3126 arranged in the vertical direction face each other in the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. Is located in The back side rendering unit 3100 in this example is configured such that the back right rendering unit 3100 R and the back left rendering unit 3 100 L are separated most from each other by the back side slide unit 3150 at a position (retracted position) farthest from each other It is possible to slide in the left and right direction independently between each other. When the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are most separated, the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are located outside the window 2501 of the center character 2500 in a front view. , And can not be viewed from the player side (see FIG. 110 etc.). And this state is a normal gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the back side rendering unit 3100 moves the back right rendering unit 3100 R and the back left rendering unit 3 100 L to the position where they are closest to each other, the rotary decorative body 3126 rotatably supported by each is the center It is located inside the window 2501 of the character 2500 in a front view, and three rotating decorative bodies 3126 vertically arranged from the player side are visible (see FIG. 159). Further, in the state where the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are closest to each other, the size of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 seen from the window 2501 of the center role 2500 is approximately equal to that in the normal state. It is half the size.

  The back side rendering unit 3100 is configured to move in accordance with the special lottery result selected by the game ball being received to the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102.

[2-7. Back-up production unit]
Next, the back-up effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148.

  The back-up effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010 and is disposed behind the unit base 3151 of the back-side slide unit 3150 in the back-side effect unit 3100 There is. The back-up effect unit 3300 is attached to the unit base 3301 mounted in the back box 3010 and extending in the left and right direction, and attached to the rear surface near the left end in the front view of the unit base 3301 and penetrating the unit base 3301. Back drive motor 3302 extending to the end, spur gear drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the back drive motor 3302, and rack gear extending in an arc shape meshing with the drive gear An arcuate plate-like slider (not shown) slidably supported in the circumferential direction by the unit base.

  Further, the back-up effect unit 3300 includes a back-up decoration base 3305 attached to the front of a slider (not shown), and a back-up decoration 3306 attached to the front of the back-up decoration base 3305 and subjected to predetermined decoration A back upper decoration substrate (not shown) is disposed between the back top decoration 3306 and the back top decoration base 3305 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Furthermore, the back-up rendering unit 3300 is disposed on the back of the back-up decoration base 3305 and attached to the front of the unit base 3301 and covers the drive gear and the front of the slider, and a unit base cover 3308 Three cylindrical shaft members (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction with the front and rear ends supported by the 3308 and the unit base 3301 at predetermined positions, and rotatably inserted into each shaft member, and the outer periphery is And a plurality of bushes (not shown) which can be brought into contact with the slider. The back-up effect unit 3300 is slidably supported in the circumferential direction with respect to the unit base 3301 via a shaft member and a bush.

  The back-up effect unit 3300 is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and is attached to a predetermined position of the unit base 3301 and a slide position detection sensor (not shown) capable of detecting the slide position of the slider. A back upper relay substrate (not shown) for relaying the connection between the substrate and the first drive substrate 3026 is provided.

  Further, although the illustration is omitted, the back-up effect unit 3300 is provided with magnets at the front end right side end of the back-up decorative body base 3305 and the front end right side of the unit base 3301, respectively, attracting each other It is attached in the direction.

  Although not shown, the unit base 3301 of the back-up effect unit 3300 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is open, and can accommodate a drive gear, a slider, and the like. Further, although not shown, the unit base 3301 is provided with three shaft holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and into which the rear end of a shaft member (not shown) is inserted.

  Although not shown, the drive gear of the back-up effect unit 3300 has an outer diameter of about 2/3 the height of the unit base 3301, and is a large-diameter spur gear It is considered to be a gear.

  Also, although not shown, the slider of the back-up effect unit 3300 extends in a circular arc having a center below the unit base 3301 and is formed with a substantially constant width, and the outer circumferential surface in the radial direction There is a rack gear engaged with the drive gear. In addition, the slider is formed at both ends in the circumferential direction, a mounting portion for attaching the back upper decoration base 3305, a slit extending in the front and rear direction at the approximate center in the radial direction and extending in the circumferential direction And a plate-like detection piece formed on the right end outside of the rack gear in a front view.

  The slider of the back-up effect unit 3300 is configured such that a bush inserted into a shaft member whose rear end is supported by the shaft hole of the unit base 3301 abuts on the radially inner peripheral surface and the slit. It can slide in the circumferential direction smoothly by rotating the bush which touches. Further, the slider is closed at both ends of the slit, and the bush abuts on the circumferential end of the slit, whereby the sliding range in the circumferential direction of the slider is restricted. Furthermore, in the slider of the back-up effect unit 3300, the detection piece is made detectable by the slide position detection sensor, and when the detection piece is detected, it is possible to detect the slide position of the slider, that is, the back decoration. It can be done.

  The back-up decoration base 3305 of the back-up effect unit 3300 is formed so as to extend along the slider in a front view although the detailed illustration is omitted, and the left end in the front view is attached to the left end of the slider and the right end is a unit It can be attached to the right end of the slider through a through hole (not shown) of the base cover 3308. The back upper decorative body base 3305 is formed in a flat plate shape from the approximate center in the left-right direction to the left in front view, and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the back upper decorative body 3306.

  The back decoration 3306 of the back rendering unit 3300 is formed in a shallow (thin) relief shape imitating a clenched fist, and provided with a light transmitting decorative portion 3306 a made of a predetermined character in a portion corresponding to the back of the hand (See Figure 160). The back-to-back decorative body 3306 is formed in a state in which light other than the outer periphery and the decorative portion 3306 a is nearly opaque, and is given a predetermined color by screen printing or the like. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the color as a decoration given to the front of the back surface decoration 3306 is made into the color which lightness becomes low (it becomes dark), so that it goes away from outer periphery.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back-side decorative substrate of the back-side effect unit 3300 at positions corresponding to the outer periphery of the back-side decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306 a on the front side. As a result, the outer periphery of the back upper decorative body 3306 and the decorative portion 3306 a can be respectively light emitting and decorated by the back upper decorative substrate.

  The back-up effect unit 3300 in this example is slidably supported in the circumferential direction by a unit base 3301 and a unit base cover 3308 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in front view. This slider is in a state in which the chord with respect to the arc of the slider is substantially perpendicular to the arc of the slider in a counterclockwise direction in a front view from a state in which the left side is slightly lower in front view It is possible to slide in the circumferential direction up to (the state of the appearance position).

  In the back-up effect unit 3300, in the normal state, the left side of the string with respect to the arc of the slider is slightly lowered with respect to the horizontal. In this state, the back-up decoration 3306 attached to the front side of the slider Are located directly in front of the unit base 3301. Therefore, in the normal state, the back top decoration 3306 of the back top rendering unit 3300 is positioned above the window 2501 of the center character 2500 and is not visible to the player, that is, in the retracted position. It is in the state (see FIG. 110).

  On the other hand, the back-up effect unit 3300 slides the slider in the counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view counterclockwise by the drive of the back-up drive motor 3302, and in a state where the chord with the arc of the slider becomes substantially perpendicular, The attached back upper decoration 3306 is positioned below the front of the unit base 3301 and the fist is directed downward. In this state, the back decoration 3306 of the back rendering unit 3300 hangs down from the upper side of the window 2501 in the center character 2500 into the window 2501 and is positioned approximately at the center of the window 2501. It can be viewed from the side, that is, the appearance position (see FIG. 160).

[2-8. Back down production unit]
Subsequently, the under-back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 and 148. The under-back effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction below the opening 3010 b in the back box 3010 and disposed behind the back-left guide member 3070.

  The under-back effect unit 3500 of this example is formed in a predetermined shape substantially symmetrical in the left-right direction, and is partially disposed on the back side of the under-back decorative body 3501 having translucency and on the back side of the under-back decorative body 3501. A back-bottom decorative substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a slider (not shown) disposed on the back side of the back-bottom decoration substrate and attached to the back-bottom decoration 3501, and the back side of the slider And a shallow box-like unit cover 3504 which is slidably supported in the vertical direction so as to be able to slide the slider in the vertical direction and which is open on the rear side, and mounted on the rear side of the unit cover 3504 A shallow box-like unit base 3505 whose front side is open, and an under-back drive motor 3 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 3505 for slidingly driving the slider in the vertical direction It is provided with a 06, a.

  The back bottom decoration 3501 of the back bottom effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a flame. Although not shown, the sliders of the reverse-back effect unit 3500 are vertically spaced at the positions of the left and right ends, are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and project rearward from the cylindrical support bosses and the center between the support bosses. And a pair of slits extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction.

  A unit cover 3504 of the under-back effect unit 3500, although not shown, is separated in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-back direction and extends in the up-down direction with a pair of elevation guide grooves into which the support boss of the slider is slidably inserted. A pair of through holes extending in a circular arc shape so as to be laterally symmetrical centering on the left and right direction between the pair of elevation guide grooves and extending in the left and right direction and extending in the front and rear direction. The unit cover 3504 is configured to be able to slidably support the slider in the vertical direction by the pair of elevation guide grooves.

  The unit base 3505 of the underside rendering unit 3500 has the same external shape as the external shape of the unit cover 3504, and can form a box with a shallow depth in the front-rear direction with the unit cover 3504. . The under-back drive motor 3506 of the under-back effect unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3505 at a position on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view and rotates while attached to the unit base 3505 An axis extends through the unit base 3505 to the front side.

  In addition, although the illustration of the under-back effect unit 3500 is omitted, a spur gear shaped drive gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the under-back drive motor 3506 between the unit cover 3504 and the unit base 3505 and a drive gear mesh with each other. Is disposed on the right of the drive gear in a front view, and is rotatably supported by the unit base 3505. The first transmission gear in mesh with the first transmission gear is disposed on the right of the first transmission gear in a front view. And a second transmission gear in the form of a spur gear rotatably supported by the unit base 3505 and a second transmission gear, and disposed at the same height as the drive gear on the right side in a front view of the second transmission gear A spur gear-like third transmission gear rotatably supported by the base 3505 and a unit engaged with the drive gear and at a position on the left side in a front view with respect to the drive gear The fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the sleeve 3505, an extending piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and a unit cover 3504 projecting forward from the tip of the extending piece on the left side in a front view A left link member having a transmission pin slidably inserted into the slit on the left side of the slider through the through hole and a third transmission gear, and a position on the right of the third transmission gear in front view The fan-shaped gear portion rotatably supported by the unit base, the extension piece extending radially outward from the gear portion, and the right side of the unit cover 3504 projecting forward from the tip of the extension piece And a right link member having a transmission pin slidably inserted into the right slit of the slider through the through hole.

  Although the lower back rendering unit 3500 is not shown, the left link member and the right link member are disposed symmetrically with respect to the center in the left-right direction, and the drive gear is rotationally driven by the back left drive motor 3506. The drive gear and the plurality of transmission gears allow the left link member and the right link member to rotate in opposite directions with each other at the same height. That is, by rotating the left link member and the right link member, the height positions of the respective transmission pins are changed, and the slider, that is, the lower back decoration 3501 is slid vertically by the transmission pins. It can be moved up and down.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the under-back effect unit 3500 is inserted from the rear side into the support boss of the slider inserted in the elevating guide groove of the unit cover 3504 and is disposed between the support boss and the elevating guide groove An elevation bush, a transmission bush inserted from the front side with respect to the transmission pin of the left link member and the right link member inserted in the slit of the slider, and disposed between the transmission pin and the slit; An arc-shaped gear press arranged between the drive gear and attached to the unit base 3505, and an elevation position detection attached to the front of the unit base 3505 to detect the slide position (raising and lowering position) of the under-back decoration 3501 Back-to-back relay that is attached to the front of the unit cover and relays the connection between the back-to-back decorative substrate and the second drive substrate 3027 And it includes a plate, a.

  Although the left link member of the underside rendering unit 3500 is not shown, it has a detection piece that extends outward in the radial direction on the side opposite to the gear portion with respect to the rotation axis, and this detection piece is used The rotation position of the left link member can be detected by the detection by the elevation position detection sensor, and the elevation position of the back lower decoration 3501 can be detected.

  In the lower back rendering unit 3500 of this embodiment, the lower back decoration 3501 is positioned below the window 2501 of the center character 2500 when the lower back decoration 3501 is positioned at the lower end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction. It is located, and can not be viewed from the player side (a state of the retracted position) (see FIG. 110). On the other hand, in the state where the lower back decoration 3501 is positioned at the upper end with respect to the slide end in the vertical direction, the lower back decoration 3501 is positioned in the upper window 2501 from the lower side of the window 2501 in the center character 2500 The player is in a state visible from the player side (the state of the appearance position) (see FIG. 160). As shown in FIG. 160, when the back-up decoration 3306 of the back-up effect unit 3300 and the back-down decoration 3501 of the back-down effect unit 3500 are in the state of appearance positions, the lower end and the upper end of each are displayed. Come close enough to not touch.

[2-9. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. This liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from the left and right sides as shown in FIG. 114, FIG. 115, etc., and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing pieces 1902. It is supposed to be.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010 d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 protrudes from the left side in front view After the two fixing pieces 1902 are inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing parts 3010 e on the right side of the back box 3010 in the back view, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion opening formed by the locking mechanism 3040. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3040 downward and closing the insertion port.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 housing a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 161) and the like on the rear side. And a volume 1912 extending rearward from the bottom of the By appropriately rotating the volume 1912 in the direction, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. It has become.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 further includes an inverter substrate box 1920 housing an inverter substrate 1922 having an inverter for driving a cold cathode tube as a backlight on the left side of the peripheral control substrate box 1910 in a rear view.

[2-10. Moveable production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 157 to FIG. 160. FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front right central rendering unit in the front unit, and FIG. 158 (a) is the normal position of the movable decorative body in the front right of the front right central rendering unit. FIG. 6B is a perspective view of the movable decorative member in the front right side, viewed from the front of the front side. Further, FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back side rendering unit in the back unit, and FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back up rendering unit and the back down effect unit in the back unit. . In the gaming board 4 of this example, as shown in FIG. 110 etc., in the normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the player through the window 2501 of the center character 2500. It is supposed to be.

  In the normal state of the game board 4, as shown in FIG. 110, etc., the movable ornament 2610 in the front right of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 of the center combination 2500 of the front unit 2000 has a window in a front view It is located at the right end of 2501 and the outer periphery of the circular fixed decoration 2620 in the front right middle movable decoration 2610 is surrounded by the front right outer periphery decoration member 2730 of the front right outside rendering unit 2700. In this normal state, the fixed decorative body 2620 of the back right middle movable decorative body 2610 can be viewed entirely from the player side, while the rotary decorative body 2630 is from the player side except a part of the left side in front view It can not be seen.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back right decoration unit 3100R and the back left production unit 3100L of the back side rendering unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back top decoration 3306 of the back top effect unit 3300, the back bottom decoration of the back bottom effect unit 3500 A body 3501 is located outside the window 2501 of the front view center character 2500, and can not be viewed from the player.

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a rendering unit 2600 in the front right in accordance with a special lottery result which is drawn by accepting game balls from the normal state to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, The back side rendering unit 3100, the back up rendering unit 3300, and the back down rendering unit 3500 can be appropriately moved to perform predetermined movable rendering.

  Specifically, for example, in the front right central rendering unit 2600, the first rotary drive motor 2651 is rotationally driven to rotationally drive the annular rotary decorative body 2630 of the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right in a predetermined direction. be able to. At this time, as described above, only part of the left side of the rotary decorative body 2630 can be seen from the player side in the front view, so when the rotary decorative body 2630 rotates in this state, the circular fixed decoration is made. It is possible to show the player the movable effect that the left side of the body 2620 flows upward or downward depending on the rotation direction.

  Further, in the front right central rendering unit 2600, the base second member 2660 supporting the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right is driven by rotating the front second drive motor 2671 around the bearing portion 2662 formed at the upper end thereof. It can be pivoted, and can be pivotally moved from the normal position located on the rightmost side in the front view, which is a normal state, to the appearance position located on the front center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 157). ). In the state of this appearance position, as shown in FIG. 157, the movable decoration 2610 in the front right moves from the front right outside the rendering unit 2700 in the front view left direction, and only a part of the front left side is viewed from the player The rotating decorative body 2630 of the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right which is not visible can be detached from the back side of the outer peripheral decorative member 2730 in the front right, and most of them can be viewed from the player side.

  By rotating and moving the front right central rendering unit 2600 to the appearance position, the movable decorative body 2610 in the front right moves to a position closer to the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the movable decorative body 2610 in front is from the player's side You can make it stand out. The movable decorative body 2610 may be made more noticeable by rotating the rotary decorative body 2630 by driving the front first drive motor 2651 while moving the movable decorative body 2610 to the appearance position. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly to the movable ornament 2610 in the right of the table.

  As shown in the figure, in the appearance position, the guide piece 2664 is extended to the front upper right side of the stage 2510, and the movable decoration body in the front right is extended from the stage 2510 side. Even if the game ball bounces to the 2610 side, it can be bounced to the stage 2510 side by the guide piece 2664.

  The guide piece 2664 of the rendering unit 2600 is located on the extension of the right side of the first stage 2511 in the front view of the stage 2510, and is formed by the unit base 2502 and the partition member 2520. The game ball deviated from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) to the right from the right end side of the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) guides the guide piece 2664, because it is guided by the arc-like groove (space). Even if it is housed and held in (refer to FIG. 158 (a)), the game ball housed and held is guided by moving the rendering unit 2600 in the front right (movable decoration 2610 in the front right) from the normal position to the appearance position. It can be pushed leftward by the piece 2664 and can be returned to the stage 2510 side.

  The guide piece 2664 of the front right middle rendering unit 2600 can fly the gaming ball housed and held at the left end side to the stage 2510 side by the speed of moving the movable decoration 2610 from the normal position to the appearance position in the front right. (See FIG. 158 (b)), so it is possible to show the player a motion different from the motion of the gaming ball rolling the stage 2510 within the frame of the center character 2500, and the motion of the gaming medium to the player It is made to be able to be entertained and to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, in the back side rendering unit 3100 of the game board 4, the back side right slide unit 3100R and the back side left effect unit are driven by driving the back side right slide drive motor 3152 and the back side left slide drive motor 3159 in the back side slide unit 3150. The 3100 L can be moved from the position (retraction position) which can not be viewed from the player side to the center side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to a position (appearing position) which can be seen from the player side See Figure 159). With the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L moved to the appearance position, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side is in the left-right direction by the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. While the width is narrowed in the vertical direction, the rotary ornaments 3126 vertically arranged in three rows are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the display screen which can be viewed from the player side. Can be strongly attracted to the back right rendering unit 3100R, the back left rendering unit 3100L, and the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this Yokoura rendering unit 3100, three rotary decorative bodies 3126 supported respectively by the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are axially extended separately in the vertical direction by the drive of the back lateral rotation drive motor 3123 The rotary ornaments 3126 of the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L can be rotated around by rotating them when they are visible from the player side. The movable effect by the rotation of the decorative body 3126 can also be enjoyed.

  Specifically, for example, when moving the back right rendering unit 3100R or the back left rendering unit 3100L of the back side rendering unit 3100 to the appearance position, the rotating decoration body is driven by the back side rotation drive motor 3123 in the state of the retracted position. The 3126 is rotated so that the face on which the predetermined decoration is made is stopped so as to face the player, and then moved to the appearance position, and each time it is moved to the appearance position, the rotation decoration 3126 rotates. It is also possible to make stop positions different. Thus, the decoration of the rotary decorative body 3126 is different each time the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L are made to appear, and the player can be entertained by the difference in the appearing appearance.

  Alternatively, when moving the back right rendering unit 3100R or the back left rendering unit 3100L from the retracted position to the emerging position, move the rotating decoration 3126 to the emerging position while rotating the rotary ornaments 3126 by the respective back side rotation drive motors 3123. You can also. As a result, a plurality of rotating ornaments 3126 rolling like a roller appear on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, the player is strongly interested in the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L. It can be attracted.

  Furthermore, after moving the back right rendering unit 3100R or the back left rendering unit 3100L to the appearance position, the rotating decoration 3126 may be rotated by each back horizontal rotation drive motor 3123, whereby the back right rendering The left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are covered with the unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L, and the rotating decoration 3126 supported by the back right rendering unit 3100R and the back left rendering unit 3100L is further rotated. It is possible to surprise the person and make the player pay attention to the rotating decoration 3126 and the like, and enjoy the movable effect by the rotating decoration 3126.

  In the back-up effect unit 3300 of the game board 4, the back-up drive motor 3302 is driven to slide the back-up decorative body 3306 downward in an arc shape from a retracted position where it can not be seen from the player side It can move to the appearance position which can be visually recognized from the person side. When the back decoration 3306 is in the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the approximate center of the fist in the back decoration 3306 imitating a fist is very close to the player located at the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Furthermore, in the backside down effect unit 3500 of the game board 4, by driving the backside down drive motor 3506, the upside back view decorative body 3501 can be viewed from the player side from the retracted position where it can not be viewed from the player side. It can be moved to the appearance position. When the back bottom decorative body 3501 is at the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, it extends upward from the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center character 2500 at substantially the center in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900. .

  In the gaming board 4 of this example, assuming that both the upside rendering unit 3300 and the underside rendering unit 3500 are moved to the appearance position, as shown in FIG. 160, the lower end of the upside decoration 3306 and the underside decoration A state in which the upper end of the body 3501 comes close to each other, and a back effect 3306 imitating a fist performs a movable effect such as striking a back under decoration 3501 imitating a flame It is possible to

  Further, although the game board 4 is not shown, the movable effect by the front right central rendering unit 2600 and the movable effect by the back horizontal effect unit 3100 or the movable effect by the back upper effect unit 3300 and the back lower effect unit 3500 It is possible to perform a movable effect combining the above, and to present the player with more various movable effects so that the player is less likely to get bored.

[3. Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first start opening sensor 3081 for detecting gaming balls received in the first start opening 2101 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received in the second start opening 2102. A detection signal from a general winning opening sensor 3082 for detecting gaming balls received in 2125 and the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 is input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, a gate sensor 2126, and a general winning opening, respectively. Detection signals from sensor 3082, count sensor 2114, and magnetic detection sensor 3080 attached to back unit 3000 are input through panel relay board 3025 attached to game board 4 and main control I / O port 4100b. It is supposed to

  The main control MPU 4100 a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100 b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100 g based on these detection signals, whereby the starting port solenoid 2124 and the attacker via the panel relay board 3025. The first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3025, and the function display board 1191 A drive signal is output to the symbol storage indicator 1184, the second special symbol storage indicator 1187, the normal symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1190.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the gate sensor 2126, and the count sensor 2114. A contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3082. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2105, so the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2126 also frequently occurs. Therefore, proximity switches with a long lifetime are used for the first start opening sensor 3081, the second start opening sensor 2125, and the gate sensor 2126. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2114 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long life is used as the count sensor 2114. On the other hand, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3082 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3082.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. (To describe)). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off by this capacitor. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 161, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the gaming balls performs payout control by the payout control unit 4111 which performs various control related to payout and the firing solenoid 654 and A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to start the ball releasing operation.

[3-2A. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 161, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  An out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754 or displays an error LED indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The payout control I / O port 4111 b outputs a signal to be displayed on the dispenser 4130 to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The serial number is sent to the main control board 4100 via the serial interface, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the inlet of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are firstly transmitted through the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 4120 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and sphere feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input as shown in FIG. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the launch reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. . The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or finger is touching the front of the rotating handle main body 506 and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal is first input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main side relay terminal plate 880, and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d emits a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with a striking strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. In response to the input of the reference pulse, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 161, performs peripheral control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[3-3 A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 161, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041, or the game board A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various rendering units provided in 4 In order to transmit to the drive substrate 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal Light emission data is transmitted from the frame I / O port for frame drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. In addition to transmitting the control data (display command) to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit, the control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d is used as the sound source IC 4140 c. Output.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various rendering units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140 a through a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is done. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 Control is performed so that music and sound effects etc. matched to various effects flow from the speaker 821, and provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 or motor drive board 3045 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 , And a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 are supplied with a lighting signal or a blinking signal through the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting blink command. A lighting signal or a lighting signal based on the game board side lighting blink command which is output to the LED such as each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in the door frame 5. The blinking signal is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2115, 2118, 2127, 2133, 2521, 5222, 2640, 3020, 3021, 3129, 3130, etc. provided on the game board 4.

  Further, the first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 are configured to receive the drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body and the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. And the drive motors 3123, 3152, 3159, 3302, 3506 etc. provided in the game board 4.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the first drive substrate 3026 and the second drive substrate 3027 attached to the rear surface of the 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the first drive board 3026, the second drive board 3027, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay The main frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the terminal plate 882 or the first drive board 3026 and the second drive board 3027 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821 of FIG. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to a low-pitch speaker 821 It is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[3-4. Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 161, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands and various data. Liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above, character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d And a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150 c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display 1900. I have control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding schedule data, and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method to output.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing the respective persons is called "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the main scanning is sequentially performed for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It outputs to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pixels are output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right.

[4. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 162 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main control as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. The data stored in the built-in RAM 4100 e is initialized. The RAM clear switch 4100 c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100 c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU 4100 a receives the clear signal at the power on. If it is determined that there is, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

  Although not illustrated, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is executed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the main control built-in RAM 4100 e. Then, if the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). And executing recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100 c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set in the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol The reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the fluctuation random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (the fluctuation time) required for the fluctuation display control of, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The reach random number to be subjected to the lottery process of whether or not, the symbol random number to be subjected to the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be the big hit based on the special random number (first symbol random number A random number counter for holding random numbers such as two symbol random numbers), random numbers (normal random numbers) and the like to be provided for the lottery process for the hit of the operation trigger of the movable piece 2106, etc. To have.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2101 is started, the second start opening 2102 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 mS.

  FIG. 162 (b) is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 162 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, detection signals from various sensors such as the gate sensor 2126, the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, and the general winning opening sensor 3082 It is input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number counter (the special random number, the ordinary random number) related to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol among the random numbers is updated The operation is performed.

  And after updating the random number in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the above special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a second special processing symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e indicating the progress of the game) The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the processing of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process according to a hit when the movable piece 2106 becomes an operation trigger. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is such that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2106 becomes higher when a specific condition (time-short flag ON) is satisfied after the big hit gaming state is over. It becomes a structure which performs a lottery process (what is called time saving state). In this embodiment, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and this time is also long as an operation time when the movable piece 2106 operates. By setting to, it is made to realize a short time state in which the reception of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 is facilitated more than the normal state (non-short time state).

  Specifically, in the control of the time saving state (referred to as time saving control), the winning probability of the above normal symbol is set to "255/255", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is always "0.08 seconds". The time for which the movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state (the retracted state where the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102) after the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol is "5.5 seconds" There is. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, the normal hit is always won, and then the game ball that has passed passes through the first passage 2122a (guide route where time can be gained by the recess shape). By stopping the variation of the normal symbol in a time (0.08 seconds) shorter than the time to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2106, the game ball which has become a trigger for a normal hit is selected. The second starting port 2102 is adapted to be received as it is. It should be noted that after the movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state (the retracted state in which the game ball can be received in the second start opening 2102) for "5.5 seconds", the movable piece 2106 is closed (in the second start opening 2102). The game ball is operated to be in the reverse state where it becomes unacceptable.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-saving control, the second symbol is set by setting the selection probability of the normal symbol to 0% and setting the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) The reception of the game ball to the mouth 2102 is disabled. It should be noted that the winning probability of the normal symbol may be 0% or more even in the non-time-short state, and in this case the winning probability (for example 50%) lower than that of the time-short state When the movable piece 2106 of the second start opening 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the short time, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2102, it is advanced again. The game ball may not be accepted into the second start port 2102.

  That is, in the non-time-shortened state, winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is impossible, or winning with an extremely low probability, even if you hit the right. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls are won in the first start hole 2101 instead of the second start hole 2102 (so-called “left It is considered to be advantageous for the player to strike ").

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and furthermore, the movable piece 2106 of the second starting opening 2102 is retreated for a long time (in this example, 5.5 seconds). This makes it easy to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2102. Therefore, in the non-time-shortened state, the game ball is fired at the right side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls are won in the second start hole 2102 instead of the first start hole 2101 (so-called "right It is considered to be advantageous for the player to strike ").

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state (short time state) in which the so-called open extension function is activated is "255/255", but in the ordinary lottery It is not necessary to always win 100% of normal hits, such as setting with a probability that a normal hit is easily obtained.

  In addition, as the time saving control, control to increase the winning probability of the above normal symbol than the non time saving state, control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the above normal symbol than the non time saving state, movable of the second starting opening 2102 Control to extend the period for retracting the piece 2106 more than in the non-short state, control to increase the number of times to retract the movable piece 2106 of the second starting port 2102 than in the non-short state, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second Any one or any of the controls for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display 1186 (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display 1900) to be shorter than the non-short time state A combination (or all) may be executed.

  When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs the special symbol process process as a process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100 e is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like. Next, in step S17, a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the normal symbol process processing is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 or the like.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as processing of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects the first starting opening sensor 3081, the second starting opening sensor 2125, the count sensor 2114, the general winning opening sensor 3082 and the like as the processing of step S19. When the signal is in the on state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball is in the first start hole 2101 and the first start hole sensor 3081 is turned on, the "three balls", the game ball is in the second start hole 2102 and the second start When the mouth sensor 2125 is turned on, "one ball", when the gaming ball is won in the large winning opening 2103 and the count sensor 2114 is turned on, "14 balls", the gaming ball in the general winning opening 2104, 2201 Then, when the general winning opening sensor 3082 is turned on, the winning balls of "10 balls" are respectively paid out to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes storage processing of checking increase and decrease of the number of holdings as processing of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 163, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3081. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and incorporated into the main control A first starting opening passage process such as storing in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100 e is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number under the condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2125 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2102 is present) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S40a) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol and the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol is "4R normal big hit" , When it comes to a mode that suggests either "4R latent probability big hit" or "4R probability variation big hit", the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or in the big winning opening 2103 Control to the 4R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just the 4R big hit gaming state for a short time open) that repeats the open / close pattern to be closed four times when it is detected by the count sensor 2114 that nine game balls have won , When the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol becomes a mode that suggests "16R sudden probability big hit", big winning opening 21 3R is controlled for 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just 16R big hit gaming state for only a short time open) which repeats opening / closing pattern to close after opening for a short time (for example 0.5 second) 16 times, the first special symbol When the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop at the time becomes the mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit", after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) or After the opening and closing pattern to be closed when the count sensor 2114 detects that nine game balls have won in the opening 2103 is repeated eight times, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and then closed. Control the open / close pattern to be repeated 8 times to the 8R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just the 8R big hit open gaming state for a long time open) and change display of the second special symbol When the result of the lottery process for the display mode at stop time becomes the mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", after the long winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) or in the large winning opening 2103 Control to 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just long time open 16R big hit gaming state) which repeats opening / closing pattern to be closed when the count sensor 2114 detects that 9 game balls have won a prize Execute the process

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving control is being executed, the right hitting is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (right hitting state), while when the time saving control is not executed, the left hitting is performed. Is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (left strike state). However, in the left-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the first special symbol according to the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101, the big hit gaming state of long time opening up to 8 rounds is executed Be done. On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, the big hit gaming state of up to 16 rounds of long time opening When the jackpot is won, the expected value of the winning ball that can be obtained when the big hit is won is large, so when it is controlled to shift to the right, it is larger than when it is left It is possible to expect to win the prize ball.

  Also, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the big winning opening 2103, according to the winning type of the big hit that was the opportunity to be played the big hit game, high probability flag, time saving flag, and time saving Execute each set process of the counter. The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination processing shown in FIG. 168 described later and is set until the next big hit occurs (the first shown in FIG. 173 described later Special symbol stop processing or second special symbol stop processing not shown).

  The short-time flag is a flag indicating that time-shortening control is being executed (low probability time short state, high probability time short state), and a big hit (time low control state, low probability time short state) is performed after the big hit gaming state is over 4R probability variation big hit, 16R hit probability big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R big hit gaming state based on) is set when ending the big hit game state, when the next big hit first special symbol stop processing which is shown in Figure 173 which it mentions later Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S35), then the small hit execution flag indicating that it is controlled to the small hit gaming state is set as the process of step S36. Determine if As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S40b) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control processing, processing is performed to open the special winning opening 2103 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds). However, in the small hit control process (step S40b), unlike the big hit control process (step S40a), after such open control of the big winning opening 2103 is performed, a high probability flag, a short time flag, a short time counter, etc. Each set process is not performed.

  In addition, if the small hitting execution flag is not set (NO in step S36), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0 (Step S37), the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol hold storage Lottery according to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the second special symbol on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the area is not “0” (step S37) The second special symbol process process including the process is executed (step S39). That is, in this embodiment, as long as the player does not lose the lottery for the second special symbol put on hold (unless the value of the second special hold number counter is "0"), Regardless of the reservation status of the lottery for the second special symbol, it is preferentially executed so that only the lottery for the second special random number is continuously performed without interruption.

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 3081 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2101, as shown in FIG. 164. In step S41, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM 4100e, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is judged whether it is "4" which is the (upper limit) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol (lottery for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. The following steps S43 to S44 are to be performed in order to set the state of. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e as each random number acquired in the step S41. Store in and complete the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by ending the process without executing the process of step S43 to step S44.

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second starting opening sensor 2125 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 2102, as shown in FIG. 165. In step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM 4100e, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is judged whether or not it is "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly reserved. The following steps S53 to S54 are performed in order to achieve the state of (4). That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e as each random number acquired in the step S51. Store in and complete the process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of step S53 to step S54.

  When the number of reservations for the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2101, a command for instructing the number of reservations for the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) (first suspension Set the number specification command 0 to 4) and send it to the peripheral control board 4140. If the number of reservations for the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2102, the above storage process (step In S20), a command (second pending number specifying command 0 to 4) instructing the pending number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process processing (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. First special random symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM 4100e is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing etc. for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol. Normal processing (step S80)

  2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )

  3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)

  4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)

  5. The first special symbol display mode 1185 is displayed as the first special symbol display 1185 when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control suspension of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 162).

  FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 167, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e as the processing of step S102. The main control built-in RAM 4100e is the random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol Read from Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM 4100e A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) relating to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2101 The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol hold storage area a to second special symbol hold storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2102 The random numbers extracted are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is in the high probability state shown in FIG. 169 (A) if the current gaming state is the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) (step S111). The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is in the low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 169A is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 169 (A), the big hit judgment table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100 d, and when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non low) for each kind of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) Big hit judgment table at low probability used in case of time saving state and low probability time saving state, and big hit at high probability used when gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability time short state) And a determination table. And, in the jackpot determination table at low probability to be compared with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot judgment value indicating that one kind of first special random number is won in the jackpot, and the first 399 kinds of first random numbers The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the special random numbers coincide with the outlier judgment value indicating that the user is the loser (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to compare with the second special random number, the first special random number Similar to the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the same, it matches the big hit judgment value indicating that one kind of second special random number is won in the big hit, and 20 kinds of second special random numbers are for small hit The second special random numbers are respectively associated in such a manner that they coincide with the small hit judgment value indicating that the player has won, and the second special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that the 379 second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss Probability big hit probability; 1 in 400).

  Also, in the high probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the first special random number, 10 kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit judgment value, and 390 kinds of first special random numbers become out of judgment value The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). Further, in the present example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, the first special random number is determined in the high probability big hit determination table to be compared with the second special random number. Similar to the high probability big hit judgment table to be referred to for comparison with the big hit judgment value indicating that 10 kinds of second special random numbers are won for the big hit, 20 kinds of second special random numbers are for small hit The second special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the small hit judgment value indicating that the player has won a prize, and to match the out-of-light judgment value indicating that the 370 second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss Probability big hit probability; 1/40). It should be noted that the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table to be compared with the first special random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to in order to be compared with the second special random number (the number of jackpot judgment values is the same number The jackpot judgment value may be made different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be made different (the jackpot probability may be made different). In this case, at least one of the jackpot judgment values of the jackpot judgment table at the low probability and the jackpot judgment table at the high probability may be made different (both may be made different).

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S115) ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation has been won in big hit is set (step S116), it ends big hit decision processing.

  If it is determined in step S115 that a big hit has been lost, the read out first special random number based on the selected big hit determination table matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit is won. It is judged whether or not it is (step S117). However, as described above, since the first special random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (small hit probability: 0/400), in this step S117, It will be determined that the small hit has not been won (judged is lost).

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol normal processing (not shown) in the second special symbol process processing (step S39), the second special random number that matches the small hitting judgment value can be read out (small hitting probability: 400 minutes 20). And, as a result, when it is judged that it agrees with the small hitting judgment value, the small hitting flag which shows that the particular fluctuation is elected to the small hitting is set (corresponds to step S118 in the 2nd special symbol process processing) Processing) and the big hit determination processing are ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S117 that there is a loss, the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S102 are compared (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100d, and is used when the gaming state is high probability non-short state, the reach determination table in high probability non-short state, and when the gaming state is high probability short state Reach determination table in the high probability time short state to be used in the case, reach determination table in the low probability state used in the low probability state (low probability short time state and low probability time short state), and Is equipped. Then, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, it is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one kind of reach random number reaches the reach, and matched with the reach determination value indicating that the 71 reach random numbers do not reach The reach random numbers are associated with one another. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, it is consistent with the reach determination value indicating that all 72 types of reach random numbers do not reach in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time reduction state , And may not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased as compared to that in the high probability time short state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 66 random numbers reach, and the reach determination value indicating that the 66 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability low state and the low probability state (low probability low state, low probability non-short state). Be enhanced.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random numbers read in step S102 (step S119), and when it is determined that reach loss has occurred (YES in step S120), A reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as shown in FIG. 170, The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 169 (B) and selects the first symbol random number and the symbol read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the designated symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 169 (B), the symbol determination table has random numbers according to the determination results (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
1. After opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 2114 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2103 The game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state where it can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and then it is controlled to the low probability short time state (the so-called normal state) until the big hit gaming state occurs

  2. After opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 2114 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2103 The game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state where it can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and then it is controlled to the high probability non-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and it is controlled to the high probability state 4R latitudinal big hit to perform difficult-to-understand

  3. After opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 2114 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2103 4R probability variation big hit that controls the game ball to be able to enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy) 4R big hit gaming state, and then control to high probability time short state until the big hit gaming state occurs next

  4. The game ball controls the game ball to enter 16R big hit gaming state where it is difficult to enter the big win port 2103 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to close after opening the big prize port 2103 for a short time (for example 0.5 seconds) 16 times, The game is controlled to the high probability time short state until the occurrence of the game state, the effect of whether the transition was controlled to the high probability time short state suddenly control without occurrence of the big hit gaming state in the middle of the game

  5. After opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) or repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 2114 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2103 eight times After that, the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the big winning opening 2103 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) 8 times (big) 8R big hit gaming state 8R probability variation big hit to control and then control to high probability time short status until big hit gaming state occurs

  6. After opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the count sensor 2114 that nine gaming balls have won in the big winning opening 2103 The game ball is controlled to the 16R big hit game state where the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 (easy), and then the high probability time short state is controlled until the big hit game state occurs 16 R probability variation big hit

  In the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2301, and the movable piece 2106 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 does not occur, only winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the first special symbol variation display in the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, the big hit related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R extra probability big hit, 8R Certainty big hit) will occur. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the gaming ball does not win in the first starting opening 2101. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 will occur, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) related to the second special symbol will occur.

  In addition, the jackpot associated with the first special symbol can be repeated eight times to open and close the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at the maximum, while the jackpot associated with the second special symbol Then, the opening and closing pattern for opening the large winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times at maximum, and the above large winning opening 2103 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time (for example, 28. Opening and closing pattern that opens the big winning opening 2103 related to the second special symbol for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined to 8R probability variation big hit repeating 8 times opening and closing pattern) In order to set the ratio (63%) determined to the 16R probability variation big hit which repeats 16 times twice as high, the game based on the winning of the game ball to the above-mentioned second starting opening 2102 is actually realized In right-handed state to be be mainly the first game based on the winning of a game ball to the starting opening 2101 in comparison with the left-handed state to be executed the acquisition of a large amount of prize balls.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be 4R normal big hit, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit symbol as big hit symbol, and when it is decided to 4R latent probability big hit, it is 4R latent probability big hit symbol as big hit symbol. If you decide and decide on 4R probability variation big hit, decide on 4R probability variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol, if you decide on 16R probability big hit symbol, decide on 16R high probability big hit symbol as big hit symbol and decide on 8R positive variation big hit Decide on the 8R probability variation big hit symbol as a big hit symbol. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit, it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is decided to be 4R latent probability big hit, it is 4R latent as a big hit symbol. Big hit symbol is decided, if it is decided to 4R definite variation big hit, it decides to 4R definite variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol, when it decides to 16R positive variation big hit, it decides to 16R positive variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol.

  Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 then determines whether the small hit flag is set as the process of step S133. And as a result, if the small hitting flag is set in the processing corresponding to the step S133 in the second special symbol process processing (step S39), the small hitting symbol (the mode at the time of the fluctuation stop of the second special symbol ( After determining the unique symbol stop mode) (step S134), the process proceeds to step S137.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S133, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the special symbol is in the lost pattern as the variation stop state (step S136), and then proceeds to step S137. Do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the above-mentioned lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach out, or out) as the processing of step S137. The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may indicate the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command and the change pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration symbols are changed and displayed, and the left decoration pattern → right decoration pattern → middle decoration) The stop display is performed in the order of the symbols (in addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in synchronization with the same symbol and may be displayed simultaneously at the same time)). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a identifies the 4R normal big hit among the big hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is determined to be the 4R normal big hit symbol (the combination of left, middle and right decorative symbols being the same even symbol among the symbols “0” to “9”), and the 4R latent positive big hit among the big hits is specified Is determined to be a combination of 4R latent certain big hit symbol (4R normal big hit symbol and the same left, middle and right decorative symbols as “0” to “9” will be the same even symbol among the decorative symbols), When 4R probability variation big hit is specified, it is decided as 4R probability variation big hit symbol (combination that all left, middle and right decorative symbols become “1” or “9”), and 16R certainty big hit among the big hits is specified Is 16R If the winning design (the combination of left, middle and right decorative designs is “1”, “3”, and “5” including all the designs) is determined, and 8R positive variation out of the big hit is identified, 8R positive variation Big hit design (the combination of all left, middle and right decorative designs is "5") and 16R of the big hits are identified 16R positive variation big hit design (left, middle and right decorative designs) It is determined that the combination is "7". In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of the same symbols from “0” to “9” and a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach loss) If it is decided to be a symbol) and the detachment is specified, it is decided to be a combination without an reach (a combination of at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle and right decorative symbols) If the hit is specified, it is decided to be unique (a small hit only one of the combinations in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols become irregular) and a unique outlying design without reach is determined, and from the variation pattern command At the time of elapse of the specified fluctuation time (at the end of the game effect), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 171, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing is selected (step S142), small hit flag Is set (step S143), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of small hit is selected (step S144), and if the reach flag is set (step S145), the fluctuation pattern table at the reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S146), and the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the reach If none of the grayed not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended. Thus, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 for the variation time thus determined, and the effect control is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 4100a selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM 4100 d.

  As will be described later, the variation pattern table for small hits in this example basically corresponds to step S144 in the second special symbol process processing (step S39) when in a short time state (such as high probability time short state). As in the case of the non-reach loses variation, the variation time of 0.099 seconds, which is shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, is set. However, although it will be described later, such a short fluctuation time does not necessarily have to be set in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of small hit. For example, the reach when the time is short (such as high probability time short) etc. A variation time (e.g., 12 seconds) may be set such that a pairing effect pattern that appears when obtained is obtained.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, in the non-temporal state, 164 types of fluctuating random numbers out of 241 types of fluctuating random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of fluctuating random numbers are big hit It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that any of the low reach expectation super reach effects is executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers indicate that any of the big reach expectation super reach effects is to be executed. It is set as a judgment value (223 to 240). Note that with super reach effect, the expectation of the big hit is higher than that of normal reach effect, and the player's degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach effect is executed for the player who desires the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. It is getting higher. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when it is possible to match the reach random number on the second special symbol side with the reach determination value in a time saving state (such as a high probability time short state), a small hit or a big hit The fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) which can perform the combination effect of the effect pattern which appears when it is obtained is set.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-time saving state and the time saving state The variation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of 0.099 seconds as a time saving state Is settable, and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short time state. As described above, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made the same in the short time state and in the short time state, and the player is urged to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 in the short time state. The time for winning the game ball to the mouth 2102 is secured.

  In addition, according to the fluctuation time at the time of loss of such a second special symbol when in a time saving state (such as high probability time short state), the game ball hit in the game area 1100 at intervals of 0.6 seconds second start Even if it is a situation that can be received continuously in the mouth 2102, since the symbol variation is ended before the next game ball is entered, those game balls are not subjected to the lottery process It will be suppressed that it will be discharged as it is.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 159, the right-handed game ball passes through a path (guide passage member 2142 or the like) spaced by an amount corresponding to one game ball, and the gate portion 2105 (the It is supplied to the area X immediately above the second unit 2120). And as described above, when the game ball is accepted from the area X to the gate unit 2105 (second unit 2120) when in the time saving state (such as high probability time short state), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained. (The winning probability is 100%), the movable piece 2106 of the second start port 2102 is maintained in a state of being retracted over a long period (in this example, 5.5 seconds). Therefore, if the game ball is hit to the right while in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), the second starting opening has an extremely high probability (approximately all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500). The game ball can be accepted to 2102.

  And in this example, when the player is operating the handle device 500, the gaming balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (such as high probability time reduction state), The game ball can be received more frequently at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the second start port 2102. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol disconnection based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 is extremely as fluctuation time of time saving state It can be set to a short 0.099 second. That is, in this case, when a lose is obtained, the symbol variation is ended only in a time (0.099 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so the second starting opening Even when the game ball is continuously received at 2102, the timing of the reception comes after the end of the symbol variation. As a result, even if game balls shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds are successively received by the second starting opening 2102, those game balls may be discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. Will be suppressed.

  However, although this will be described later, in this embodiment, an obstacle nail (not shown) as an adjustment member formed so as to contribute to the reception probability of the game ball to the gate portion 2105 in the area X is provided. In this way, it is possible to easily adjust the acceptance probability to the gate unit 2105 (second unit 2120) for the game ball hit to the right within a wide range including values close to “100%”. There is.

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 172, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, as a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned drawn fluctuation time has passed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) in the process of step S173, this process is ended.

  In addition, although the fluctuation timer has been decremented by 1 (step S171), when the fluctuation time timer has not become 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S171 and S172 are performed.

  FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 173, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed as the processing of the first special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 4010 (step S182).

  When the big hit flag is set (YES in step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The standby time until the start of the jackpot gaming state (the time for displaying the jackpot gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the above-mentioned time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value (step S194), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined in the process of step S35 that the big hit execution flag is set, and the big hit game in the above-mentioned big hit control process (step S40a) The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R low probability big hit) according to the type of big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R low probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R high probability big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) Set the start command, 4R probability variation big hit start command, 16R hit probability big hit start command, 8R probability variation big hit start command, 16R probability variation big hit start command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S186 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S186), it is determined whether the small hit flag is set (step S190). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S190), the small hit start command indicating that the small hit gaming state is started is set (step S191), and the small hit game is performed. The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a small hit game state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hit running flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S193), and the process of the first special symbol process flag is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. (Step S194), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S36, and the small hit control process (step S40 b) is performed. The small hit gaming state will be executed. By the way, unlike when a big hit is won, there is no case where the gaming state is changed when executing such a small hitting gaming state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S190), the first special symbol process is performed without processing for the big hit or the small hit, assuming that it is a loss. When the flag is updated such that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S194), this processing is ended. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S35 and S36), and a new game is performed according to the holding status. A process according to the progress of (lottery, symbol control) is performed (steps S37 to S39).

  FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, as shown in FIG. 174, the main The main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first executes gate part passing processing such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in an ordinary symbol hold storage area of RAM as the processing of step S802. Do.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal symbol normal processing in which the normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and the lottery processing for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1189 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S804)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S805)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1189 Normal symbol stop processing to stop the key (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of the change control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common figure”, the above-mentioned movable piece 2106 retreats, acceptance of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2102 Normal electric combination product opening processing which executes processing which can be controlled (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 162).

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate part passing process (step S802).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2126 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2105, as shown in FIG. 175, The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the process of step S811. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly put the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S812, the normal number-of-holds counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common-mode fluctuation random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S812 to step S814, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the processing in step S821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, next, as the processing of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol storage area of the main control MPU 4100a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S 823 and S 824, the normal hold number counter is counted down, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100 a is stopped The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2105 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2105, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, if the current gaming state is the short time state (low probability time short state, high probability time short state) (step S826), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the spread table per time judgment table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is the non-short state (low probability non-short state, high probability non-short state) (step S825), the non-short time per common drawing determination table (not shown) Is selected (step S827), and the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S828).

  In addition, the determination table for the common drawing is stored in the ROM 4100 d of the main control MPU 4100 a, and the determination table for the common drawing in the short time to be used when the gaming state is short (low probability time short status and high probability time short status), It has a non-time-shorting popular map determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-short (a low probability non-short condition, a high probability non-short condition). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it corresponds to the common-mode-per-diagram determination value indicating that all the 255 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to be matched with the deviation judgment value which is a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2105 at the time saving time, the player always wins the game, and the movable piece 2106 retreats to receive the game ball into the second starting opening 2102 It is possible to control.

  In addition, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all the 255 types of the normal random numbers coincide with the common drawing determination value indicating that the common drawing is won. Instead, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the deviation judgment value. As described above, in the short time, even if the game ball passes to the gate unit 2105, the movable piece 2106 is moved backward to the second starting opening 2102 because it is not won for the popular game. There is no possibility to control the acceptance of the game ball. However, as described above, the hit of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-short time condition, and in this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than the short time condition, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the hit. When the movable piece 2106 of the second start opening 2102 is retracted for a time shorter than the short time, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second start opening 2102, the second advance is performed again. The game ball may not be accepted into the starting opening 2102.

  When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S 830), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol when it is determined that A common figure as a mode (stop symbol of a normal symbol) at the time of control stop determines a misaligned symbol (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S804), this processing is ended.

[5. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, a process performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 177, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes 2 mS steady processing. In the 2mS steady-state process, a process to count up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16mS elapsed While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS lapse flag T is not set in step S502 (16 mS lapse flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS lapse flag T is set.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart of an example of 16 mS steady-state processing performed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140 a executes the process of step S601 to step S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the liquid crystal is received based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the second fluctuation pattern setting process). Control processing related to the display device 1900 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3041 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady process ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more by the end of the 16 mS steady process after the 16 mS steady process starts, the 16 mS steady process immediately after the 16 mS steady process starts (command from step S601) Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16mS has elapsed during execution of the 16mS steady process, only the 16mS elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16mS steady process is completed, the 16mS steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub main processing and the 16 mS steady processing.

  Hereinafter, the game processing when the game is advanced in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first of all, as one of its purposes, the gaming speed when in time saving state (such as high probability time reducing state) can be made faster (variation time is shorter). Sometimes. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, even when the control for facilitating the acceptance of the gaming ball to the starting opening is performed (time reduction state), the specification each time the gaming ball enters the starting opening In many cases, the probability of entering the starting opening was not set so high in order to avoid excessive payout of the winning balls. That is, in this case, the game speed when in the time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state) can not be made sufficiently high, and there is a concern that the amusement of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, even when at least one game ball not accepted in the second start opening 2102 is generated despite being driven into the game area 1100, The payout of the specific prize ball every time the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2102 is set to “1” so that the total number of the specific prize balls does not exceed the total number of game balls driven into the area 1100 It is decided to carry out suppression control.

  According to such a configuration, it is avoided that the total amount of the starting prize balls to be paid out each time the second starting port 2102 is received (in the second starting port 2102). No matter how high the probability of entering the game ball, the player's ball will not increase due to the payout according to the entering ball). Therefore, even in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), it is possible to increase the acceptance probability of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 without considering the balance with such a specific prize ball so much. become. And by such a high acceptance probability, in a time saving state (such as a high probability time-shorting state), the game ball can be continuously received more often, thereby making the game speed faster (the fluctuation time is shorter) You will be able to

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, this is intended to dramatically improve the acceptance probability of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 when in the time saving state (such as high probability time short state). The second start port 2102 is disposed in the area on the right side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100. And, on this, as shown in FIG. 130 and FIG. 159, when game balls are continuously hit in the area on the right side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100, all of those game balls are A downflow structure is adopted, which is sequentially guided to the second unit 2120 through the resin molded guide passage member 2142 so as to flow down while maintaining the mutual firing interval (0.6 seconds).

  That is, in the second unit 2120 according to this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2105 in the unit 2120 can win a prize by making the movable piece 2106 move according to the passage. 2102 has the following features so that winning is possible through the first passage 2122a and the recess 2121b (the passage from the gate portion 2105 to the second start opening 2102) integrally formed in the unit 2120. It has become.

  First, when it is detected by the gate sensor 2126 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2105, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161) acquires the ordinary random number based on the information to the effect that the detection has been made. Then, a determination (normal determination) is made as to whether a normal hit has been obtained based on the normal random numbers thus obtained. Further, the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161) causes the normal symbol display 1189 to change and display the normal symbol for a predetermined time based on the result of the normal determination. Then, as a result, when it is determined that a normal hit is obtained in the normal determination (when a specific stop display mode appears as a result of changing and displaying the normal pattern for a predetermined time), the main control board 4100 (FIG. 161). Reference) controls the movable piece 2106 to be in an open state.

  In this respect, a guide passage having a predetermined length in the second unit 2120 requires a game ball passing through the gate portion 2105 for a substantially uniform time by the structure integrally formed in the unit 2120. Therefore, it is always guided to the area (the movable area of the movable piece 2106) that can be received by the second start port 2102. On the other hand, in the time saving state (the game state in which the so-called open extension function is activated), the game ball having passed through the gate portion 2105 reaches the second starting opening 2102 (while substantially uniform time elapses) The main control board 4100 (refer to FIG. 161) performs the normal determination described above, the normal symbol variation display, and the drive control to open the movable piece 2106, etc., so that a normal hit can be obtained. The game ball passed through 2105 itself is made to be acceptable to the second starting opening 2102 (see FIG. 130).

  Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to this embodiment, in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is always "0.08 seconds", and the symbol of the normal symbol is displayed finalized The time from when the movable piece 2106 is opened to the open state is "0.008 seconds", and the time when the movable piece 2106 is maintained in the open state is "5.5 seconds", The time (interval time) after the movable piece 2106 is changed from the open state to the closed state until the next fluctuation start of the normal symbol (detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2126) is permitted is "0.05 seconds" ing.

  On the other hand, in the second unit 2120 according to this embodiment, the time until the movable piece 2106 is opened after the gaming ball passes (variation start) through the gate portion 2105 (normal symbol) is “0. The second start port 2102 is reached by taking only 088 seconds (or a time “0.1 second” added with a slight allowance time (for example, “12 ms”)). More specifically, the game ball having passed through the gate portion 2105 is made to reach the movable region of the movable piece 2106 after meandering (decelerating while earning a distance) by the concave portion 2121b (guide path) which is curved in a curved shape and recessed backward This time is secured while achieving downsizing as the unit 2120.

  In this way, when a hit is obtained in the normal lottery when in the time saving state, the game ball itself which is the cause of the hit being obtained by passing through the gate part 2105 is a guide in the second unit 2120. Through the path (the first passage 2122 a, the recess 2121 b), the movable region opened by the movable piece 2106 can be received from the movable region to the second start port 2102. And since such open state is continued only for a long time of "5.5 seconds", the game ball is 0.6 seconds in the area on the right side of the center character 2500 in the game area 1100. When the game balls are hit at intervals (when 100 game balls are hit one by one sequentially in one minute), those game balls pass through the guide passage member 2142 and the second unit 2120 to the second starting opening 2102. It becomes possible to be accepted sequentially while keeping the firing interval (0.6 seconds interval).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to this embodiment, in the time saving state (such as high probability time short state), the drawing for the second special symbol according to the acceptance to the second starting port 2102 Symbol control period (addition time of fluctuation time of symbol and stop time of symbol) until fluctuation display control of the next second special symbol being held is started when loss is obtained at. Even if the game balls shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds are successively received by the second starting opening 2102 by setting as below, those game balls are not provided for lottery processing. It is made to be able to control that it is discharged.

(A) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol, which is considered to be on hold (number of second special symbol held) is “1”, the hold is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol being performed based on the number of reservations at this point being "0", if a loss is obtained, the four game balls are started second as a fluctuation time “2.4 seconds” that can be accepted by the mouth 2102 is set, and “0.1 second” is set as the symbol stopping time (time to be fixedly stopped) thereafter.
(B) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol, which is considered to be on hold (number of second special symbol held) is “2”, the hold is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol being performed based on the number of reservations at this point being "1", if a loss is obtained, three game balls are started second as a fluctuation time “1.8 seconds” which can be accepted by the mouth 2102 is set, and “0.2 seconds” is set as a stop time of the subsequent symbol.
(C) When the number of variable display controls for the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) that is held on hold (number of held second special symbol) is "3", the hold is released ((3) When a loss is obtained as a result of a lottery for the second special symbol based on the number of reservations held at this time being "2"), when it is added to the stop time of the symbol as a fluctuation time “0.101 seconds” is set so that two game balls can be received by the second starting opening 2102, and “0.5 seconds” is set as the symbol stopping time thereafter.
(D) Hold is released when the number of the second special symbol variation display control (lottery for the second special symbol), which is considered to be on hold, is 4 (the number on the second special symbol hold) (4) As a result of the drawing for the second special symbol based on the number of reservations at this point being "3"), if a loss is obtained, it will be launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds as a fluctuation time Even if the next game ball is continuously received in the second starting opening 2102, the timing of this reception is set to "0.099 seconds" which can be made to come after the end of the symbol variation. In addition, "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the symbol after that.

  That is, according to such a configuration, when a loss is obtained when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is “1”, “2”, the number of suspension of the second special symbol is the maximum number. The time required for at least is set as the fluctuation time (configuration (a), (b)). Therefore, while the second special symbol is fluctuating, only the game balls necessary to maximize the number of holdings can be received, which basically causes the number of holdings to be maximized. Will be able to play the game.

  On the other hand, when a loss is obtained when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "3", "4", the next symbol variation being put on hold by the game holding means is started Within a relatively short time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) of the symbol control period to the symbol control period (0.601 seconds, 0.599 seconds) of up to (until suspension is released) The fluctuation state is ended, and after that relatively long time (0.5 seconds) is controlled so that the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of losing (configuration (HA), (NI )).

  In the symbol control (the number of reserved second special symbols is “3”, “4”) when there is a loss when in such a short time condition (high probability time short condition etc.), a relatively short time of the symbol control period At the same time, the fluctuation state is ended, and the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of the losing time for a relatively long time after this (the fixed stop time is longer than the fluctuation time of the pattern). In this manner, the symbol display is maintained for a long time in the stopped state at the time of losing despite the fact that it is in the symbol control period, so that the lost symbol is as if waiting for new game ball acceptance. In many cases, the gaming ball can be accepted when it is stopped. Therefore, even if the game ball can be received by the second starting port 2102 when the number of reservations is maximum (even if the game ball is ejected without being subjected to the lottery process), The game ball can be made to appear to be subjected to the lottery process.

  In particular, with symbol control (when the number of reserved second special symbols is "3" and "4") at the time of loss when in the time saving state (high probability time short state etc.), the firing interval of the game ball (0.6 seconds) In the case where the next game ball hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds can be continuously received in the second starting opening 2102 by ending the symbol variation only in less than the time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) Even if there is, the timing of this acceptance is made to come after the end of the symbol variation. Therefore, even if the game ball can be received by the second starting port 2102 when the number of reservations is maximum (even if the game ball is ejected without being subjected to the lottery process), The game ball can be made to appear to be subjected to the lottery process. In addition, it is as above-mentioned that it is hard to perform an effect with a reach (or not performed) by the symbol change at the time of the loss of the 2nd special symbol in a time saving state (high probability time short state etc.). Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second start opening 2102, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, basically the second symbol and the lost symbol of the decorative symbol are derived and displayed immediately.

  Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "4", which is the maximum number, the symbol control period until the next symbol variation being held is started (until suspension is released) There is a time (0.599 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls. Therefore, even if the game balls shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds are successively received by the second starting opening 2102 when the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum number, those game balls are It will be suppressed that it is discharged | emitted without being provided to a lottery process. In addition, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol drops from the maximum number and becomes “3”, the symbol until the next symbol variation being held is started (until suspension is released) Since the control period is a time (0.601 seconds) slightly longer than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, the generation of the game balls discharged without being subjected to the lottery process is suppressed. While, it becomes possible to be able to make the number of reservations of the second special symbol the maximum number.

  In addition, while it is possible to repeat the symbol variation repeatedly at the fastest speed (the speed each time the game ball is hit), it is also unlikely that the symbol variation will be interrupted, This also suppresses the decline in interest for gaming.

  In addition, about the stop time of the symbol in the symbol control period until the next symbol variation that is in the state of suspension is started (until suspension is canceled), it does not depend on the number of reservations of the second special symbol It may be set in a fixed time (for example, "0.5 seconds").

  According to the second unit 2120 having such a structure, in the time saving state (such as a high probability time short state), each time the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105, those game balls are left as they are in the second starting opening 2102 The possibility of being accepted will be held, and thus all of the gaming balls having passed through the gate portion 2105 can be engaged in a big hit lottery corresponding to the winning of the second start opening 2102. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the execution frequency of the big hit lottery per unit time, and by simply continuing to hit the game balls, at least until the big hit is won, there is a sense of speed in wasted balls (balls not used for lottery ) Will be realized.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the total number of starting winning balls is combined with the suppression control in which the payout of the specific winning balls every time the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 is set to "1". Although a game with a sense of speed has come to be realized while avoiding that the quantity would become excessive, at the cost of that, there is one gaming ball that was not accepted by the second starting opening 2102 However, when it occurs, the possibility that the total number of specific prize balls will exceed the total number of gaming balls hit in the game area 1100 will be "0", which is an advantageous gaming state, which is a short time (high The game value as a probability time reduction state etc. may be significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied as a result of the lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) being performed when in the time saving state (high probability time short state etc.), the specific prize ball is satisfied. Even though the squeeze control is performed such that “1” is paid out, “A <B (A: A bit in the game area 1100 until a big hit is won in a short time state (high probability time short state etc.) Total amount of game balls to be played, B: total number of prize balls including the specified prize balls to be paid out to the player before the big hit is won in a short time state (such as high probability time short state) It is designed to control the progress of the game.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 169, in the lottery for the second special symbol to be the target of the lottery when it is in the time saving state (high probability time short state etc.), it is small with the probability of 20/400. It is supposed to be won by the win. Then, when a small hit is won, processing is performed to open the large winning opening 2103 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), and the gaming ball is won in the large winning opening 2103 (count When the sensor 2114 is turned on, 14 prize balls are paid out.

  Here, if it is assumed that the acceptance probability to the second starting opening 2102 is 80% when the game ball is hit to the right when the time saving state (high probability, time shortening state, etc.), 70 pieces of game balls are hit to the right Sometimes on average 14 gaming balls will not be accepted in the second starting opening 2102. However, at this time, in view of the fact that 56 game balls on average are received by the second starting opening 2102 and are respectively provided for the lottery for the second special symbol, the average is 2 times or more on average It will be won in the small hit, it will be granted a winning opportunity of the game ball to the large winning opening 2103 (small hit probability "20/400"). Then, when one gaming ball is won in the large winning opening 2103 in these two winning opportunities (small hitting gaming state), the 14 winning balls are paid out, and thus the specific prize Even though the suppression control in which the payout of the ball is set to “1” is being performed, “A <B (A: A short time condition (high probability time short condition etc) Total amount of game balls to be hit, B: total number of prize balls including the specified prize balls to be paid out to the player before the big hit is won in the short time state (high probability time short state etc.) Will be able to play games.

In addition, since the small hit gaming state according to this embodiment is to be executed while the time saving function is activated, most of the game balls hitting the right have a big winning opening 2103. It is to be accepted by the second starting opening 2102 (80%) before reaching the stage, and an opportunity to acquire the winning ball is obtained when it is difficult to obtain the winning ball. That is, as shown in FIG. 130, the pattern in which the game ball is won in the large winning opening 2103 when in the small hit gaming state,
-The movable piece 2106 is closed, such as the time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2106 is switched from the open state to the closed state, until the next variation start of the normal symbol (detection of the gaming ball by the gate sensor 2126) is permitted. The game ball is made to flow so as to aim at a short time that has been turned on, and the pattern A is received from the second unit 2120 and then accepted by the special winning opening 2103,
The gaming ball from the guide passage member 2142 is not received by the second unit 2120 in the region X, and flows down to the side provided with the general winning opening 2104, and further not accepted by the general winning opening 2104 , Then pattern B, which is accepted by the winning opening 2103,
-Pattern C in which the game ball hit to the left is accepted by the special winning opening 2103 despite being in the short time state (such as high probability time short state)
And so on are limited to the patterns A to C.

  Here, various methods can be adopted as the pattern variation mode when the small hit is obtained, but for example, control is performed so that the non-reach lose variation mode appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. In such a case, it is possible to secure the gaming value as a time saving state (favorable gaming state) without losing the sense of speed of the game.

  That is, in this case, the fluctuation time when a small hit is obtained is set to a time (for example, 0.099 seconds) which is less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, as in the case of losing. Also in the liquid crystal display device 1900, even though the player wins a small hit, control is performed so that a non-reach lost fluctuation mode appears as an effect of this short fluctuation time. In addition, after such symbol variation (in the liquid crystal display device 1900, non-reach loss variation mode) is performed, “0.5 seconds” is set as the stop time of the lost symbol.

  In such a configuration, it will be possible to recognize that it is in the small hit gaming state (that the small hit has been won) only when the big winning opening 2103 is actually opened. Even if the handle device 500 is operated to be left-handed, the small hit gaming state is ended before the left-handed game ball reaches the big winning opening 2103. Therefore, as a variation mode of the symbol when the small hit is obtained, when the non-reach loses variation mode is controlled to appear in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the large winning opening is in the small hit gaming state. The pattern in which the game ball is won in 2103 is substantially limited to the patterns A and B among the patterns A to C described above.

  According to such a small hit gaming state, even when a small hit is won, since the same symbol processing as at the time of losing is performed, time reduction can be achieved without losing the sense of speed of the game. It becomes possible to secure the gaming value as the state (advantage game state). In this sense, even as the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the small hit gaming state is being executed, for example, when the non-reach lost fluctuation mode appears even though the special winning opening 2103 is opened. It is desirable to display the effect image that appears at the time of the loss, such as displaying the background image (moving image) as it is, from the point of view that it can be seen as if the progressing speed of the game has not been reduced. It can be said. That is, in this case, in the time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), the second hitting is performed by right-handing so that the drawing for the second special symbol in which the gaming speed (drawing speed of drawing) is increased to the maximum is performed. While the game balls are being received one after another in the starting opening 2102, the game balls are secretly received in the big winning opening 2103 as well. In this way, it is made difficult to recognize that a small hit is won, so that the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 while advancing the game one after another by the effect at the time of the loss Then, even though the suppression control is performed such that the payout of the specific prize ball is set to “1”, it is possible to proceed without losing the sense of speed of the game while increasing the balls of the player .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an open area X is provided between the closed guide passage member 2142 and the closed second unit 2120. In this area X, the gate portion 2105 is formed. An adjustment member (for example, an obstacle nail or a guide member formed by resin molding), which is not shown, is formed so as to contribute to the reception probability of the gaming ball to the (second unit 2120). That is, by arranging such an adjusting member, the probability of receiving the game ball in the gate 2105 (the second unit 2120) and hence the probability of receiving it in the second starting opening 2102 depending on the shape and position thereof. Can be easily adjusted (adjustment of a specific base value in a wide range including values close to “100” can be easily performed). In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the entry into the large winning opening 2103 when in the small hitting gaming state through the adjustment of the flow probability from the area X to the side where the general winning opening 2104 is provided. The sphere probability can be easily adjusted.

  On the other hand, as the symbol control at the time of big hit when in the time saving state (high probability time short state etc.), as in the case of losing, it is made to perform the symbol variation in a time less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball You may make it perform symbol variation in time (for example, 12 seconds) for which specific expectation production is made feasible. That is, since many of the players are playing for the purpose of being won by the big hit, it is a case where there is a game ball which is discharged without being subjected to the lottery process if it is only won by the big hit. Also, it seems that gaming interest is unlikely to decline.

  On the other hand, when the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 161) is not in the short time state (in the normal state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2105 by setting the winning probability of normal hit to 0%. The movable piece 2106 is not opened. Alternatively, although it may be normally hit, until the game ball which has passed through the gate section 2105 reaches the second starting opening 2102 (during an almost uniform time), the above-mentioned normal judgment, normal symbol Such a series of processes are performed in a longer time so that the series of processes such as the variable display of the variable and the drive control to open the movable piece 2106 are not executed. It is more advantageous for the player to advance the game by aiming for the game ball to enter the first starting hole 2101 by left-handling rather than aiming for the game ball to enter the starting hole 2102 There is.

  By the way, as described above, when there is acceptance (winning) in the second starting opening 2102, a specific prize ball will be paid out each time such acceptance, but from the perspective of the hall side, it will be for oneself. By allowing (accepting) a disadvantage (a payout of a prize ball upon acceptance to the second start opening 2102), the player is provided with a benefit (a payout of a prize ball) for the player. In some cases, the player may be playing a game without recognizing that even such prize balls are being paid out, in which case there is a concern that the burden on the hall side can not be suppressed and the decline in the game entertainment can not be suppressed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the single payout control is performed by setting the payout of the specific prize ball every time the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 to "1". The payout of each one of the specific winning balls is executed based on different triggers (executed with the winning of the different game balls to the second starting opening 2102 as a trigger). Then, after the specific award balls are paid out one by one at different triggers as described above, the payout information (for example, the light emission triggered by the winning of the second start opening 2102 or the like for each specific award ball) By providing the sound output etc. individually, it is possible to make the player feel as a bonus for each specific prize ball paid out to the player.

However, as a method of providing such payout information, for example,
a. In the time saving state, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102, the effect already presented on the liquid crystal display device 1900 causes the payout information to function as an additional effect that can contribute to the expected level of the effect. Or b. In the time-saving state, the player uses a method of producing payout information as an effect element while the player himself produces one effect until the effect mode with high expectation appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is desirable to realize in

  That is, in the pachinko machine, regardless of whether or not the specific prize balls are being paid out, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect that the result of the lottery is shown is executed continuously. There are many. And, while such effects are being performed, it is important to draw lottery information which is realized by a simple light emission or sound output each time there is a payout of a specific prize ball. It can have an adverse effect on the presentation of the result.

  In this respect, in the above method a, for example, in the time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), the game ball is in the second starting opening 2102 while the high expectation effect mode appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is performed when it is accepted, the provision of payout information according to the acceptance, the expectation degree of presentation as the presentation mode of this high expectation (probability that the big hit will be won when the presentation is appearing) It is as an additional effect that can be changed. Note that with the high expectation performance mode, for example, in the time saving state, when a variation time of 12 seconds, which is a relatively long variation time when the reach random number matches the reach determination value, is selected, or a variation when a big hit occurs When the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is selected as the time, or when the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is selected as the fluctuation time at the time of small hit, it is an effect mode that appears in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Here, as such an additional effect, for example, whenever there is acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 during a period in which a high expectation effect mode appears, the expectation as the effect is grasped Effect on the display image (for example, a background image) on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the determination result, and as a result, the display image is different from that before being acted on. It can be realized as an effect such as whether or not the display form (different shapes and different colors) is maintained. That is, in this case, when being maintained in different display forms (different shapes and different colors), the effect can be recognized as indicating a higher expectation of the effect. In addition, as to whether or not the display image is maintained in a display form (different shape or different color) different from that before the action is exerted, based on the effect drawing each time the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2102 If it is determined, even if there is a game ball which is not provided for the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game fun.

  In addition, about such a change of a display mode, by setting this to be able to be performed over a plurality of steps (the expectation rises over a plurality of steps), even after the display mode is once changed, a high expectation performance mode is obtained. Whenever there is acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 during the appearing period, it is possible to continue as an additional effect as to whether or not the expectation changes further. desirable. Also, each time there is an acceptance of the game ball to the second start opening 2102, in conjunction with exerting an action (for example, an instantaneous change) on any display image (for example, a background image) on the liquid crystal display device 1900, "Don! It is desirable to perform sound output such as

  Alternatively, sound output such as "Don!" Is performed each time there is acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 during a period in which a high expectation effect mode appears, and as a result, The higher the volume as the sound output such as "Don!" Which will be continuously output by the driving (the more the change in the output mode of the sound), the higher the expectation as the stage of the presentation Payout information may be provided by increasing the degree of expectation.

  According to such a method a, each time there is an acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, the payout information functions in the form of acting as an additional effect on whether or not the expectation for the effect of the specific effect increases. Will be provided. That is, in this case, one additional award ball is paid out each time an additional effect (action on a display image or sound output such as "Don!") To the effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 occurs. Because the player can recognize that, the payout information is given to each of the specific prize balls to be paid out to the player without adversely affecting the presentation relating to the lottery result which is the important information. It will be able to be provided separately.

  In addition, when there is an acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 when a high expectation effect mode does not appear, regardless of the display on the liquid crystal display device 1900, for example, a winning to the second starting opening 2102 Light emission (appropriate LED outside the liquid crystal display device 1900) or sound output triggered by the trigger may be generated as payout information each time. That is, in the low expectation performance mode (such as non-reach normal fluctuation), since complicated performance is not performed in the first place, such payout information does not have an adverse effect. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the non-reach mode of presentation when in the time saving state is "0.099 seconds", which is shorter than the firing interval of the game balls. It can be said that there is nothing to be affected.

  On the other hand, in the above method b, in a time saving state (such as a high probability time reducing state), the payout is taken out even when there is an acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 when such a high expectation effect mode does not appear. Information is made to function as a rendering element in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  That is, in the short time state (high probability, short time state, etc.), when the game ball is continuously hit to the right at intervals of 0.6 seconds by operating the handle device 500, the player has a relatively long fluctuation time. Basically, the low expectation presentation mode (normal fluctuation) appears one after another without interruption until the expected presentation mode appears. However, in the low expectation effect mode (normal fluctuation) according to this embodiment, there may be cases where only effect time (variation time) such as "0.099 seconds" shorter than the firing interval of the game balls may be held, etc. It is considered extremely difficult to perform each different presentation each time the symbol changes.

  Therefore, in this method b, in the time saving state (such as a high probability time short state), first, whenever the low expectation performance mode (normal fluctuation) is selected by the retention of the second special symbol, the liquid crystal display device 1900 The control to change the decoration pattern for the production time (variation time) and the control to stop it for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) are performed so as to be less noticeable (make the decoration pattern smaller) Etc.). And on this, with regard to the background image, it is not a change triggered by such a fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, but a certain change is caused each time the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2102. As a result, when a specific effect content appears in the background image, effect control is performed in which it is possible to recognize that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  That is, in the time saving state (high probability time short state etc.), when the game ball is hit to the right at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the player operating the handle device 500, that is, the player advances the game itself (When we will draw the lottery for the second special symbol one after another), the fluctuation time for changing the symbol will be obtained one after another (the lottery for the second special symbol will be reserved one after another). The above method b is to add (secure) each of such multiple fluctuation times (low expected performance mode (normal fluctuation)) as a time for performing one long presentation each time in real time, In this way, when there is an acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 in a long production time that is added (secured) in real time, it may be the status of suspension or the status of fluctuation of symbols Warazu carries out an effect that causes a change in the background image as a response to this acceptance, is that. As a result, when a specific effect content appears in the background image, it is included that the high expectation performance mode appears in the held state, and the high expectation is achieved because the hold is digested. The presentation content according to the presentation mode will appear, or the present symbol variation is the presentation mode with high expectation, whereby the presentation content according to the presentation mode with high expectation will appear.

  This makes it possible to use the payout information as an effect element when producing one effect until the highly expected effect mode appears. In addition, in the time saving state (such as high probability and time short state), each time there is an acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, an effect that a specific effect content can appear in the background image is performed, so a lottery Such that all game balls received in the second starting port 2102 appear to be played as a result of the results provided for the drawing even if there are game balls not being provided for As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the game interest. In this case, although the variation timing of the decorative symbol and the appearance timing of the rendering element are deviated, it is possible to create a novel rendering that is not bound by the variation reference of the decorative symbol.

  Here, as such an effect, for example, “a moving image in which a state in which an ally character is confronted with an enemy character is depicted” is used as the background image, and a game to the second starting opening 2102 is used. "Attack against enemy character by ally character" is used as a presentation element (change of background image) each time there is acceptance of the ball, and when there is acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102, high expectation As the effect element (specific effect content) when it is determined that the effect mode is appearing (or has already appeared), "the enemy character breaks the balance due to the attack by the ally character" is used, and the specific effect content is As a high expectation performance mode (for example, a performance pattern to which a variation time of 12 seconds is assigned) after But issues a deathblow to the enemy character "can be used.

  Then, as a result, if the high expectation performance mode is selected at the time of winning the big hit, "a moving image A depicting a situation in which the enemy character is defeated by a special attack technique" appears, after which a big hit game is started Become so. Alternatively, if the high expectation performance mode is selected at the time of the small hit, "a moving image B in which a situation in which the enemy character bears a wound by a special attack is depicted" appears, after which a small hit game starts Will be Alternatively, if the high expectation performance mode is selected at the time of reach determination, “a moving image C in which a situation in which an enemy character dodges a special move is depicted” appears, after which the next symbol variation is started. Become so.

  That is, in the short time state (high probability, short time state, etc.), when performing such an effect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first describes that “the ally character faces the enemy character to fight. Control is made to appear as a background image on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Then, if the symbol variation is performed according to the reserve digestion while the background image is appearing, the decoration symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is also slightly varied at one corner of the display screen by the variation time of the symbol. To be controlled.

  In addition, while the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls such a decoration pattern, a big hit is won in the lottery held on hold based on the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2102 A determination is made as to whether or not there is a thing (or a high expectation effect mode appears), or a decision is made as to whether the current symbol variation is a high expectation effect mode. Then, as a result, when it is determined that there is no jackpot winning item (or not a high expectation effect mode) in the lottery held in the pending state, the ally character as the background image makes the enemy character Control (effect control at the time of losing) on the effect image appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed so that a state of attacking (punching, kicking, etc.) is newly depicted.

  According to such effect control, the second start-up port 2102 is selected until it is determined that a high expectation effect mode appears (or until it is determined that a high expectation effect mode already appears). Every time there is acceptance of the game ball, an attack (punch, kick, etc.) by the ally character is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the player operates the handle device 500 at intervals of 0.6 seconds while operating in the short time state (such as high probability time short state). If the player continues to hit the right, the game ball is more likely to be received at the second starting opening 2102 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when such a method b is adopted, a depiction in which the teammate character continuously attacks every 0.6 seconds is generated, which makes it possible to use one method. Even if a single variation has only a short presentation time (variation time), the player can proceed with the game itself, so that a series of attacks by allied characters and a battle until the special move described later is issued. You will be able to create a conceptual presentation of

  And, while the continuous attack by such ally characters is depicted, is there a big win being won (or a high expectation presentation aspect appears) in the lottery that is in the pending state? Or, if it is determined that the current symbol variation is a high expectation effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a causes the enemy character to lose balance due to an attack (continuous attack) by the ally character so that a depiction showing suki appears. Control of the effect image appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. Then, after this, while the enemy character is out of balance, the time until the end of the rendering time (or the rendering time already started) is ended by the high expectation performance mode being started. While the ally character issues a special move (great skill) to the enemy character, and further controls any one of the above-mentioned moving images A to C to appear as a background image on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the result of the lottery. Become. In addition, the stop aspect of the decorative symbol according to the result of a lottery will appear at the timing which the production | presentation after taking out such a special move is complete | finished.

  By the way, when a game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2102 while such high expectation effects are being performed, the method a can be applied to such high expectation effects whenever there is an acceptance. You may make it produce. For example, a predetermined meter image is displayed in addition to the effect image such as "Ally character gives a special skill to the enemy character", and each time the game ball is accepted while the high expectation effect is being performed, It is conceivable that by performing an effect that this meter image may extend to the side with a high expectation of the effect, an expected degree as the effect is indicated. However, in view of the fact that the player often cancels the launch of the game ball during the period in which the high expectation effect mode appears, the second starting opening is limited to the game period until the high expectation effect mode appears. Each time the game ball is received to 2102, payout information may be provided by the method b such that the player can recognize that the specific prize ball is paid out. Alternatively, in other game periods, it may be realized by simple light emission or sound output each time the game is received.

  By the way, in such an effect, the player keeps hitting the gaming ball right at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the operation of the handle device 500, and the player himself advances the game so that the suspension is not interrupted. Even if you have only presentation time (variation time) such as "0.099 seconds" shorter than the firing interval of the game balls, you can create one conceptual presentation with a relatively long presentation time The

  However, if the player may interrupt the operation of the handle device 500 in the middle stage of such an effect, the symbol will fluctuate when the game ball can not be received in the second starting opening 2102 Even if there is a draw or a draw that is held on hold, the effect will not be advanced. That is, in this case, even though the variation control of the decorative symbol is continued, control is performed such that "a moving image in which a state in which an ally character faces to fight against an enemy character is drawn" appears. After that, when the big hit is won by the detention of the hold, the decorative symbol is a big hit when "a moving image depicting a situation in which the ally character faces to fight against the enemy character" appears. After being displayed in the stop mode of, the big hit game will be started.

  As described above, according to such a rendering method, it is possible to experience the actual feeling of the payout for each award ball by the rendering elements that appear in the process of creating one rendering. Further, regardless of the fluctuation time (rendering time), it is possible to realize an entertaining effect such that the effect is changed in real time by the player's game. Moreover, since not only the game balls provided for the lottery but also the game balls not provided for the lottery (the game balls for the overflow) are used as the effect elements of the respective occasions, launch of the game balls can be promoted. It will be.

  In addition, as described above, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost in the short time state, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. Also, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. And, as described above, since the game ball hit to the right of the center character 2500 is received by the second start opening 2102 with extremely high probability in the short time state, the holding ball of the second start opening 2102 is about 0.6 seconds It will occur at intervals. In other words, even if the variation time of the second special symbol at the time of disconnection is extremely shortened, the holding ball can be improved by striking the gaming ball to the right of the center character 2500 to improve the frequency of occurrence of the holding ball of the second special symbol. It does not disappear immediately.

  In other words, even if control is executed to win a large number of gaming balls in the second start port 2102 in a very short time during the time saving state, the second special symbol is displayed in a very short time by executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It is possible to prevent an increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and to extremely increase the number of display of variation of the second special symbol per unit time as compared with the non-short time state. As a result, in the high probability time short state where transition control to the right hitting state is performed, in addition to the control to improve the occurrence frequency of the time saving control and the holding ball, the control to improve the jackpot winning probability is executed. As compared with the above, it is possible to win the next big hit in a very short time, and it is possible to improve the game interest by being able to obtain a large number of winning balls in a short time.

  Here, in the above embodiment, among the game balls accepted by the second unit 2120, the game balls not accepted by the second start port 2102 are supplied to the big winning opening 2103. The winning opening 2103 may be provided between the gate unit 2105 and the second start opening 2102. That is, in this case, even when a small hit gaming state occurs when the time saving state is in place, the game ball hit to the right is easily accepted by the big winning opening 2103 without being accepted by the second start opening 2102 Become. As a result, the gaming ball can be received in the second starting opening 2102 (the second starting opening 2102 which can be entered only by hitting the right) when the symbol variation is not performed due to the occurrence of the small hitting gaming state. Can be avoided, and the generation of gaming balls that are not provided for lottery despite entering the second starting opening 2102 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as a method b for production, a variable time (a low-expected performance mode (normal fluctuation)) for a plurality of times is added (secured) in real time each time as a time for performing one long production When there is acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 in the long production time that is added (secured) in real time in this way, it is in the situation of suspension and the fluctuation situation of the symbol Regardless, it is said that the effect of causing a change in the background image is performed with this acceptance as a trigger. However, a long rendering time can be secured without causing a change in the background image triggered by the acceptance of the game ball. That is, in this case, the background image (if it is "0", it is depicted that the ally character faces the enemy character in order to battle with the enemy character depending on whether the lottery being held is "0" or not. As long as the animation) is different and the lottery held on hold is not “0”, the free rendition (continuous attack by the ally character) is not bound by the fluctuation timing of the decoration symbol or the reception timing of the game ball, etc. )I do. And, while the continuous attack by such ally characters is depicted, is there a big win being won (or a high expectation presentation aspect appears) in the lottery that is in the pending state? Or, when it is determined that the current symbol variation is a high expectation effect mode, an attack by the ally character (continuous attack) causes the enemy character to lose balance and show a ski, and further, the ally character is against the enemy character. The control of the effect image is performed so that one of the above-mentioned moving images A to C appears as a background image on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the result of the lottery.

  The second unit 2120 may be configured to cause all of the gaming balls received by the gate unit 2105 to enter the second starting opening 2102 when in the time saving state. That is, in this case, the winning probability of the normal symbol is "100%" and "the time from when the variation of the normal symbol is started to the final decision stop, the movable piece 2106 is opened, and further the movable piece 2106 The game has passed the gate section 2105 for the time (interval time) until the next variation start of the normal symbol (detection of the game ball by detection by the gate sensor 2) is permitted after it is closed from the open state to the closed state. The time taken for the ball to reach the movable region of the movable piece 2106 is shorter.

  For example, the variation time of the normal symbol is always "0.08 seconds", the time from when the symbol of the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed until the movable piece 2106 is opened "0.008 seconds", the movable piece 2106 is The time (0.2 seconds) to be maintained in the open state, the time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2106 is closed to the closed state after the movable piece 2106 is allowed to start fluctuation of the next normal symbol is “0 It is desirable to set “.05 seconds”. According to such a configuration, even in the case where the two game balls driven in pass through the gate portion 2105 in succession, a series of processing regarding the normal symbols for the game balls fired earlier is ended. At this stage, it becomes possible to start a series of processes for the normal symbol of the game ball launched next.

  Further, when all of the gaming balls received by the gate unit 2105 are allowed to enter the second starting opening 2102, the holding function of the normal symbol is not provided. That is, when such a normal symbol holding function is provided, the timing of variation disclosure of the normal symbol will deviate from the timing when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2105, whereby the movable piece 2106 is opened. It is because the opportunity which a game ball arrives may be greatly reduced according to the timing of becoming a state.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 body frame 4 game board 5 door frame 1100 game area 1150 game panel 1900 liquid crystal display 2000 table unit 2500 center character 2600 effect unit 2601 support pin 2610 surface right movable ornament 2620A fixed Decorative body 2623 Light shielding member 2623a Partition piece 2625 Front cover (cover)
2626 Production sheet (pattern film, smoked sheet)
2626a Black part (pattern membrane)
2626b Blue part (pattern membrane)
2626c Red part (pattern membrane)
2626d Uncolored part (smoked sheet)
2627 diffusion lens sheet 2628 holding member 2640 front right inside decoration substrate (decoration substrate)

Claims (1)

A starting hole capable of receiving a game ball, and a special lottery means for performing a special drawing based on the reception of the game ball to the starting hole, and a special game is executed based on the result of the special drawing being a hit. Game machine, and
A gate provided upstream of the starting opening;
Normal lottery means for performing a normal lottery based on the game ball passing through the gate;
A movable member operable to facilitate reception of gaming balls into the starting opening;
Movable member control means capable of executing control for facilitating acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening by operating the movable member according to the result of the normal lottery by the normal lottery means;
Equipped with
The game ball passed through the gate provided in one unit is received by the operation of the movable member according to the result of the normal lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball itself to the starting opening provided in the same unit Made possible,
further,
The game ball which has passed through the gate has deceleration means for reducing the flow-down speed of the game ball until it reaches the movable member ,
The variable display of the normal symbol is performed according to the normal lottery by the normal lottery means, and the variable display of the normal symbol can be performed in a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball to be fired,
It is possible by one game ball from the passage of the gate to the entrance of the starting opening whose reception is facilitated by the control of the movable member based on the passage of the gate, and the one game ball The number of gaming balls awarded as a prize for having entered the starting opening is also only one,
The flow path between the gate and the movable member flows down to the movable member so that all gaming balls having passed through the gate can not be received by the start opening by the operation of the movable member. A game machine characterized in that a region communicating with the flow path is provided .